JP6774545B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Conventionally, a game called pachislot is provided with a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols provided on their respective surfaces, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "start operation") after the game medium such as a medal or coin is inserted into the game machine, and the rotation of all reels is rotated. Output a signal requesting a start. The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting that the rotation of the corresponding reel be stopped. To do. The stepping motor transmits its driving force to the corresponding reels. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In such a game machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "internal lottery process") is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter, "internal winning combination") is performed. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the combination of symbols related to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the combination of the symbols. As an example of the privilege given to the player, the payout of the game medium (medals, etc.) and the operation of the re-game (hereinafter, also referred to as "replay") in which the internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game medium. , The operation of a bonus game that increases the chances of paying out game media can be mentioned.

The above-mentioned game machine usually has a circuit (main control circuit) that controls the main game operation of the game machine such as determination of an internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel, and determination of presence / absence of winning, and mainly video. It is equipped with a circuit (sub-control circuit) that controls the effect operation by displaying. Then, a command is transmitted from the main control circuit to the sub control circuit to control the operation of the sub control circuit.

By the way, in a gaming machine having such a configuration, an advantageous gaming state is achieved by short-circuiting the power supply wiring in the gaming machine with, for example, a metal member or the like during the game and erasing the command transmitted from the main control circuit to the sub control circuit. The fraudulent act (act called "goto") that generates the above has become a big problem. For example, when the replay wins a predetermined number of times in a row (when a command including the winning information of the replay is continuously transmitted from the main control circuit to the sub-control circuit), a predetermined privilege is given to the player. In a gaming machine having a function, when a role other than the replay wins a prize in a situation where the replay is continuously winning, if the power supply wiring is short-circuited by a goto action at that timing, the command including the winning information is deleted. In this case, the continuous winning state of the replay is maintained, and it becomes possible to illegally obtain a predetermined privilege.

Therefore, various techniques for detecting and preventing the above-mentioned goto behavior have been conventionally proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In Patent Document 1, it is determined whether or not the derivation result specified from the winning determination command can be derived according to the winning flag specified from the internal winning command, and the presence or absence of fraudulent activity is determined. Then, when it is determined that there has been a fraudulent act, the privilege granting is regulated and the abnormality notification is performed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-005950

By the way, conventionally, when the assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT") function, which is a function for navigating the formation of a specific small winning combination with a lamp, or the "AT" function, and a specific symbol combination are displayed. It has a function to operate a gaming state in which the winning probability of replay is higher than normal, that is, an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as "ART") function in which the replay time (hereinafter referred to as "RT") function is activated at the same time. In the game machine, there is a demand for a technique that makes it impossible to easily guess the timing and the trigger when the winning of "AT (ART)" is decided.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the winning opportunity and timing of "AT (ART)" cannot be easily guessed.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process described later) that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability, and
A variable display means (for example, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R and three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R, which will be described later), which is composed of a plurality of display columns and displays a symbol required for the game in a variable manner.
A notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) capable of transmitting display auxiliary information for displaying a combination of symbols giving an advantageous state to the player on a determination line straddling the plurality of display rows, and
At least one of the assist times (for example, "D_ART" and "B_ART" described later) that enable the notification means to notify the display assisting information based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. It is provided with an assist time determining means (for example, ART lottery processing described later) for determining whether or not the player has won.
When the winning of the assist time is determined by the assist time determining means, it is determined whether or not the winning of the assist time can be notified in a specific number of games after the determination.
The gaming machine of the previous SL present invention, execution of the assist time determined to allow notification of winning of the assist time, than the execution of the assist time the winning of the assist time has not been determined to permit notification Ru is priority
A game machine characterized by that .

An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process described later) that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability, and
A variable display means (for example, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R and three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R, which will be described later), which is composed of a plurality of display columns and displays a symbol required for the game in a variable manner.
A notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) capable of transmitting display auxiliary information for displaying a combination of symbols giving an advantageous state to the player on a determination line straddling the plurality of display rows, and
At least one of the assist times (for example, "D_ART" and "B_ART" described later) that enable the notification means to notify the display assisting information based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. It is provided with an assist time determining means (for example, ART lottery processing described later) for determining whether or not the player has won.
When the winning of the assist time is determined by the assist time determining means, it is determined whether or not the winning of the assist time can be notified in a specific number of games after the determination.
The front Symbol assist time, the first state (e.g., coalescence mode 2 described later), a hard compared with the first state to win in the assist time second state (e.g., coalescence modes 0 below), There is
When the assist time is won during the operation of the assist time, the ratio of determining that the win of the assist time can be notified in the first state is the ratio of the assist time in the second state. not high than the percentage that determines to permit notification of winning
A game machine characterized by that .

According to the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to prevent the winning trigger and timing of the "AT (ART)" from being easily guessed.

It is a figure for demonstrating the functional flow of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the circuit provided in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub-control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the bonus operation time table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the RT transition table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table determination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (No. 1) for a general gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (No. 2) for a general gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT2 gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT3 gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RB1 gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RB2 gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RB3 gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table for a bonus in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table (No. 1) for small combination / replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table (2) for small combination / replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table (No. 3) for small combination / replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 4) for small combination / replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table (No. 5) for small combination / replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the correspondence table (the 1) of the data pointer for small combination / replay and the display combination in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the correspondence table (the 2) of the data pointer for small combination / replay and the display combination in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number selection table for rotating cylinder stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop initial setting table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for the 1st stop at the time of forward push in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the control change table at the time of forward push in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for the 2nd and 3rd stop at the time of forward push in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the irregular push stop table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pull-in priority table selection table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pull-in priority table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the search order table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game lock lottery table A in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game lock lottery table B in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game lock lottery table C in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the output condition table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the subtraction condition table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol correspondence winning operation flag data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display combination storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation stop button storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pressing order storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pull-in priority data storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game lock flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the RT state of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the winning combination and the stop order in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the winning combination, the stop order, and the RT transition form in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the sub-game state of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special flag lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery flag A-1 lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery flag A-2 lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery flag A-3 lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery flag B-1 lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery flag B-2 lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery flag B-3 lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery flag D lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery flag G lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery flag H lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery flag I-1 lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery flag I-2 lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery flag J lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery flag K lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 8) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 9) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (No. 10) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (11) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table (12) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (13) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (14) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (15) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 16th) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (17) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table (the 18) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART stock area distribution lottery table (No. 1) in general and CZ in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART stock area distribution lottery table (No. 2) in general and CZ in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table number determination table at the time of stock in general and CZ in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 1) at the time of a fixed combination in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table (2) at the time of a fixed combination in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (3) at the time of a fixed combination in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table (the 4) at the time of a fixed combination in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table (No. 5) at the time of fixed combination in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table number determination table at the time of stock at the time of fixed combination in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (No. 1) in B_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (No. 2) in B_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (No. 3) in B_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table (the 4) in B_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (No. 5) in B_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (No. 6) in B_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table (7) in B_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table (8) in B_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table (9) in B_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (10) in B_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table (11) in B_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table (12) in B_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (No. 1) in D_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (No. 2) in D_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (No. 3) in D_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table (the 4) in D_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table (No. 5) in D_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (No. 6) in D_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table (7) in D_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table (8) in D_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table (9) in D_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table (10) in D_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table (11) in D_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table (12) in D_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table number determination table at the time of stock in B_ART, D_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table (the 1) in G_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table (2) in G_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (No. 3) in G_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table (the 4) in G_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table (No. 5) in G_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table (6) in G_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 1) in R_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table (2) in R_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table number determination table at the time of stock in G_ART, R_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART stock area distribution lottery table (the 1) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART stock area distribution lottery table (the 2) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART stock area distribution lottery table (No. 3) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART stock area distribution lottery table (the 4) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 1) in a bonus in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (2) in a bonus in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table number determination table at the time of stock in a bonus in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special ART lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special ART lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table number determination table at the time of special ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART stock non-consumption lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART stock non-consumption lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stock content determination table of the ART lottery result in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table of billy touch correct answer / incorrect answer at the time of VR lock in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the billy touch lottery table (the 1) in VR in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the billy touch lottery table (2) in VR in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the billy touch lottery table (3) in VR in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the billy touch lottery table (the 4) in VR in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the VR middle revolution lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the VR middle revolution lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the VR middle revolution lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the VR middle revolution lottery table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the VR middle revolution lottery table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the VR middle revolution lottery table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the VR middle revolution lottery table (the 7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the VR middle revolution lottery table (the 8) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the VR middle revolution lottery table (the 9) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the VR middle revolution lottery table (10) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the VR middle revolution lottery table (11) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the VR middle revolution lottery table (12) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the VR middle revolution lottery table (13) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the VR middle revolution lottery table (14) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the VR middle revolution lottery table (15) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART precursor game number lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART precursor game number lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART precursor game number lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery table (the 1) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery table (2) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number lottery table (the 3) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the title lottery table for development effect 1 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect number determination table (the 1) for development effect 1 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect number determination table (the 2) for development effect 1 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect determination table for development effect 1 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (the 7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (the 8) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (9) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (10) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (11) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (12) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (13) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (14) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (15) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 16) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the title lottery table for development effect 2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map lottery table (No. 1) for development effect 2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map lottery table (No. 2) for development effect 2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect lottery table number determination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect lottery table (the 1) for the table number 1 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect lottery table (the 2) for the table number 1 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect lottery table (the 1) for the table number 2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect lottery table (the 2) for the table number 2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect lottery table (the 1) for the table number 24 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect lottery table (the 2) for the table number 24 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (the 7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (the 8) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (9) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (No. 10) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (11) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (12) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (13) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (14) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (15) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (No. 16) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect rewriting condition table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the sub storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table with the table number and various states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of a loop mode data and a loop mode in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a main flowchart which shows the processing example of the main control circuit of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the medal acceptance / start check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the internal lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the lottery value change process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game lock lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the reel stop initial setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the lock processing at the start of a game in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the pull-in priority order storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the pull-in priority table selection process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the symbol code storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the reel stop control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the slide piece number determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd and 3rd stop processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the line change bit check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the line mask data change processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the priority pull-in control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the control change processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the control change process after the 2nd stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of RT control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control process at the end of a game in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the bonus end check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the bonus operation check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the interrupt process controlled by the main CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main board communication task executed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect registration task executed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect content determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of receiving a start command in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the lottery flag determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of ART lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the VR-related processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the illegal processing at the time of receiving a start command in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect rewriting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the display combination command reception processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the count process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the precursor check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the VR-related display time processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the billy touch correctness determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a bonus in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of receiving a bonus start command in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of receiving a bonus end command in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the animation task executed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the billy touch input processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the reception interrupt process controlled by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention.

Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine will be taken as an example of a gaming machine showing an embodiment of the present invention, and its configuration and operation will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, the assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT"), which is a function for navigating the formation of a specific small winning combination with a lamp or the like, and the winning probability of replay when a specific symbol combination is displayed are calculated. A pachi-slot machine having a function of operating a higher gaming state than normal, that is, an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as "ART") function in which a replay time (hereinafter referred to as "RT") function is operated at the same time will be described. ..

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot machine will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium.

When a medal is inserted by the player and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter, random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means draws a lot based on the extracted random number value, and determines the internal winning combination. This internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the valid line (winning determination line) described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning" in which benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and other so-called "losses". Such things are provided.

Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel is pressed by the player, the reel stop control means controls to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. This reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later.

In pachislot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as the "number of sliding pieces". Then, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set for four symbols.

When the internal winning combination that allows the combination display of the symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually sets the combination of the symbols to the effective line within the specified time of 190 msec (for 4 symbols). Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible along the line. In addition, the reel stop control means uses various specified times corresponding to the gaming state to stop the rotation of the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the effective line. Let me.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line is related to winning. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. Then, when it is determined by the winning determination means that the combination of the displayed symbols is related to the winning, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. In pachislot, the above-mentioned series of flows is performed as one game (unit game).

Further, in pachislot, in the flow of the above-mentioned series of game operations, image display performed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, light output performed by various lamps, sound output performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof is performed. Various productions are performed using it.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random value for effect (hereinafter, a random value for effect) is extracted in addition to the random value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines the effect to be executed this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination by lottery. This effect content determining means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the sub-control circuit described later.

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determining means, the effect execution means responds in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the reel starts rotating, when each reel stops rotating, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. To execute. In this way, in pachislot, by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination, the player has an opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at). It is provided and can improve the interest of the player.

<Structure of pachislot>
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachislot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot machine 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a that houses a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that is openably and closably attached to the cabinet 2a.

Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only the handles 7 on one side are shown in FIG. 2). The handle 7 is made of a concave member, and a worker's hand is hung on the handle 7 when the pachi-slot machine 1 is transported.

Three reels 3L, 3C, 3R (variation display means) are provided inside the cabinet 2a, and the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are arranged in a row in the horizontal direction (direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the reels). Will be done. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel (display row) has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. A plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are drawn on the surface of the sheet material along the circumferential direction (reel rotation direction), and the symbols adjacent to each other along the arrangement direction of the symbols are arranged at predetermined intervals. To.

The front door 2b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, and a liquid crystal display device 11 (notifying means). The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable by using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left side end of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front side (player side) of the pachislot machine 1.

The liquid crystal display device 11 is attached to the upper part of the door body 9, and performs an effect by displaying an image. The liquid crystal display device 11 includes a display unit (display screen) 11a including a display window 4 for displaying a pattern drawn on the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. In the present embodiment, the image is displayed and the effect is executed using the entire display unit 11a including the display window 4.

The display window 4 is formed of a transparent member such as an acrylic plate. The display window 4 is provided at a position overlapping with the arrangement areas of the three reels when viewed from the front (player side), and is provided so as to be located in front of the three reels (player side). Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels provided behind the display window 4 through the display window 4.

In the present embodiment, the display window 4 is continuously arranged among a plurality of symbols drawn (arranged) on each reel when the rotation of the corresponding reel provided behind the display window 4 is stopped. It is set to a size that can display one pattern. That is, in the frame of the display window 4, upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas (hereinafter, referred to as upper area, middle area, and lower area, respectively) are provided for each reel, and one symbol display area is provided. The design is displayed. That is, the design is displayed in the display window 4 in a 3 × 3 arrangement form. Then, in the present embodiment, the line (center line) connecting the middle stage area of the left reel 3L, the middle stage area of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage area of the right reel 3R is defined as an effective line for determining whether or not to win. To do.

The front panel 10 is attached so as to cover the peripheral portion of the display screen (display unit 11a) of the liquid crystal display device 11 at the upper part of the door body 9, and is arranged so as to be superimposed on the front surface of the display unit 11a. The door. Then, the front panel 10 has a decorative frame 101 in which three panel openings 101a, 101b, 101c are formed to expose a necessary display screen area in the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11, and three panel openings of the decorative frame 101. It has a transparent protective cover (not shown) that closes 101a, 101b, 101c.

The decorative frame 101 further has a partition piece 112 for partitioning the panel opening 101a and the panel opening 101b, and a partition piece 113 for partitioning the panel opening 101b and the panel opening 101c. That is, the three panel openings 101a, 101b, 101c are arranged so as to be arranged in the vertical direction by the partition pieces 112, 113. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the upper region of the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11 is exposed to the panel opening 101a of the decorative frame 101, and the lower portion of the display unit 11a is exposed to the panel opening 101c. Partition pieces 112 and 113 are arranged in the panel opening 101b so that the area is exposed and the central area of the display unit 11a and the display windows 4 of the three reels are exposed.

Two character decoration portions 22L and 22R (hereinafter, also referred to as a left character decoration portion 22L and a right character decoration portion 22R) are provided near both corners of the upper end of the decoration frame 101. In the present embodiment, a character called "Billy" is formed in a three-dimensional shape on the surface of each character decoration portion.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 2, the two character decoration portions 22L and 22R are provided with two touch sensors 23L and 23R (hereinafter, also referred to as a left touch sensor 23L and a right touch sensor 23R), respectively (FIG. 2). 4 and FIG. 5). The left touch sensor 23L detects that the player's hand has touched (or approached) the left character decoration portion 22L, and the detection result is reported to the sub-control circuit 42 (see FIGS. 4 and 5) described later. Send. On the other hand, the right touch sensor 23R detects that the player's hand has touched (or approached) the right character decoration portion 22R, and transmits the detection result to the sub-control circuit 42 described later.

Further, the decorative frame 101 is provided with various lamps (lamp group 21) and a movable decorative unit 121 (see FIGS. 4 and 5). The lamp group 21 includes an LED (Light Emitting Diode) and the like, and turns on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the effect content.

The movable decorative unit 121 is arranged on the back side of the decorative frame 101 (the side opposite to the player side), and is hidden behind the decorative frame 101 in the normal state (when a specific effect is not performed). To. Then, when a specific effect is performed, the movable decoration unit 121 moves to the front side of the display unit 11a and becomes visible from the panel opening 101a of the decoration frame 101.

A pedestal portion 12 is provided in the center of the door body 9. The pedestal portion 12 is provided with various devices (medal insertion slot 13, MAX bet button 14, 1BET button 15, start lever 16, three stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, etc.) to be operated by the player.

The medal slot 13 is provided to receive medals dropped on the pachislot machine 1 from the outside by the player. The medals received from the medal slot 13 are used in one game up to a preset number of medals (for example, 3), and the number of medals exceeding the preset number is inside the pachislot machine 1. Can be deposited at (so-called credit function).

The MAX bet button 14 and the 1BET button 15 are provided to determine the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to be used for one game. Further, although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a settlement button. This checkout button is provided to pull out (discharge) the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

The start lever 16 is provided to start the rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a 7-segment display 6 (see FIG. 4) composed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode). The 7-segment display 6 provides information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of medals to be paid out), the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits), and the like. Is displayed digitally.

A medal payout outlet 18, a medal tray 19, two speakers 20L, 20R, and the like are provided at the lower part of the door body 9. The medal payout outlet 18 guides the medals discharged by driving the medal payout device 33, which will be described later, to the outside. The medal tray 19 stores medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 18. Further, the two speakers 20L and 20R output sound effects such as sound effects and music corresponding to the content of the production.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1, and is a diagram showing a state when the front door 2b is opened with respect to the cabinet 2a.

The cabinet 2a is composed of a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box-shaped member having one surface open on the front side (front door 2b side).

A main board 31 on which a main control circuit 41 (see FIG. 4) described later is mounted is provided near the upper end portion in the cabinet 2a. The main control circuit 41 is a circuit that controls the main operation of the game in the pachislot machine 1 and the flow between the operations, such as determination of the internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel, and determination of the presence or absence of winning. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 41 will be described in detail later.

A reel unit including a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R is provided in the vicinity of the central portion in the cabinet 2a. Although not shown in FIG. 3, each reel is connected to a corresponding stepping motor (one of the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R in FIG. 4) described later via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. ..

A medal payout device 33 (hereinafter referred to as a hopper 33) having a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and ejecting them one by one is provided near the lower end portion in the cabinet 2a. Further, in the vicinity of the lower end portion in the cabinet 2a, one side portion (left side in the example shown in FIG. 3) of the hopper 33 is provided with a power supply device 34 that supplies necessary power to each device of the pachislot machine 1. Be done.

A sub-board 32 on which a sub-control circuit 42 (see FIGS. 4 and 5) described later is mounted is provided near the upper end of the front door 2b on the back surface side (opposite to the display screen side). The sub-control circuit 42 is a circuit that controls the execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like. The specific configuration of the sub-control circuit 42 will be described in detail later.

Further, a selector 35 is provided near the substantially central portion on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The selector 35 is a device that selects whether or not the material, shape, and the like of medals inserted from the outside are appropriate via the medal insertion slot 13 (see FIG. 2), and the hopper 33 determines that the medals are appropriate. I will guide you to. Further, although not shown in FIG. 3, a medal sensor 35S (see FIG. 4) for detecting that a proper medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 35.

<Circuit configuration of pachislot>
Next, the configuration of the circuit included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a block configuration diagram of the entire circuit included in the pachi-slot machine 1. FIG. 5 is a block configuration diagram showing an internal configuration of the sub-control circuit.

The pachi-slot machine 1 includes a main control circuit 41 (main control means), a sub control circuit 42 (sub control means), and a peripheral device (actuator) electrically connected to these circuits.

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 41 is mainly composed of a microcomputer 50 mounted on a circuit board (main board 31). As other components, the main control circuit 41 includes a clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, a sampling circuit 57, a display unit drive circuit 64, a hopper drive circuit 65, and a payout completion signal circuit. Includes 66.

The microcomputer 50 is composed of a main CPU (Central Processing Unit) 51, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 52, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 53.

The main ROM 52 stores control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 51, data tables such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 42, and the like. The main RAM 53 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, and a sampling circuit 57 are connected to the main CPU 51. The clock pulse generation circuit 54 and the frequency divider 55 generate (generate) a clock pulse. Then, the main CPU 51 executes various control programs based on the generated clock pulse. Further, the random number generator 56 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). Then, the sampling circuit 57 extracts one value (random number value for lottery) from the generated random numbers.

Various switches, various sensors, and the like are connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50. The main CPU 51 receives input signals from various switches and the like to control the operation of peripheral devices such as stepping motors 61L, 61C and 61R.

The stop switch 17S (stop operation detecting means) detects that each of the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R is pressed by the player (stop operation). The start switch 16S (start operation detecting means) detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation). The checkout switch 14S detects that the checkout button has been pressed by the player. Further, the bet switch 12S detects that the bet button (MAX bet button 14 or 1BET button 15) is pressed by the player.

The medal sensor 35S (insertion operation detecting means) detects that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 13 has passed through the selector 35.

Further, as peripheral devices whose operation is controlled by the microcomputer 50, there are three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R (variation display means), a 7-segment display 6, and a hopper 33. Further, a drive circuit for controlling the operation of each peripheral device is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50. Specifically, the motor drive circuit 62, the display unit drive circuit 64, and the hopper drive circuit 65 are connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50.

The motor drive circuit 62 controls the drive of three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively. The reel position detection circuit 63 detects a reel index indicating that the reel has rotated once for each reel by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit. The reel position detection circuit 63 is connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50 and outputs the detection result to the microcomputer 50.

Each of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, and 61R has a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of pulse outputs and the rotation axis can be stopped at a specified angle. Further, the driving force of each stepping motor is transmitted to the corresponding reel via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. Then, each time a pulse is output to each stepping motor, the corresponding reel rotates at a constant angle.

The main CPU 51 detects the reel index of each reel and then counts the number of times a pulse is output to the corresponding stepping motor to rotate the rotation angle of each reel (specifically, how many reels there are symbols). Only rotated).

Here, a method for managing the rotation angle of each reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to each stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) required for rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the value of the symbol counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53 is set to "1". "Is added. The symbol counter is provided for each reel. Then, the value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection circuit 63.

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the value of the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

The display unit drive circuit 64 controls the operation of the 7-segment display 6. The hopper drive circuit 65 controls the operation of the hopper 33. Further, the payout completion signal circuit 66 manages the detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 33S provided in the hopper 33, and checks whether or not the number of medals discharged to the outside from the hopper 33 has reached a predetermined number of payouts. To do. The payout completion signal circuit 66 is connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50 and outputs the check result to the microcomputer 50.

Further, an external terminal plate 18S is connected to the main control circuit 41. Then, the main control circuit 41 is connected to the external hall computer or the calling device 100 via the external terminal plate 18S. When a predetermined internal winning combination is won and a predetermined stop operation sequence is detected, the main control circuit 41 transmits a jackpot signal “3” to be described later to the hall computer or the calling device 100.

[Sub-control circuit]
As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the sub-control circuit 42 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 41, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. .. As shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control circuit 42 basically includes a sub CPU 81, a sub ROM 82, a sub RAM 83 (sub storage means), a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, and a driver 86. Further, the sub-control circuit 42 includes a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 90, an audio RAM 91, an A / D (Analog to Digital) converter 92, an amplifier 93, and a movable decoration unit drive circuit 96.

The sub CPU 81 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the sub ROM 82 based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. The sub ROM 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored in the program storage area. In the control program stored in the program storage area, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 41, an effect random value is extracted, and an effect content (effect data) is determined. An effect registration task for registration, a drawing control task for controlling the display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the determined effect content, a lamp control task for controlling the light output by the lamp group 21, and a speaker. A program such as a voice control task for controlling the sound output by 20L and 20R is included.

The data storage area includes, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing production data constituting various production contents, a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation, and BGM (Back-Ground Music). It includes various storage areas such as a storage area for storing sound data related to sound effects and sound data, and a storage area for storing lamp data related to a pattern of turning on and off light.

The sub-RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined effect content, effect data, and the like, and a storage area for storing various data such as internal winning combinations transmitted from the main control circuit 41.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control circuit 42 includes a liquid crystal display device 11, speakers 20L, 20R, lamp group 21, touch sensors 23L, 23R (selection operation detecting means), a movable decoration unit 121, and the like. Peripherals are connected. That is, the operation of these peripheral devices is controlled by the sub-control circuit 42.

In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81, the rendering processor 84, the drawing RAM 85 (including the frame buffer), and the driver 86 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and the created image is generated by the liquid crystal display device 11. Is displayed.

The sub CPU 81, DSP 90, audio RAM 91, A / D converter 92, and amplifier 93 output sounds such as BGM by the speakers 20L and 20R according to the sound data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 81 turns on and off the lamp group 21 according to the lamp data specified by the effect content.

Further, the sub CPU 81 and the movable decoration unit drive circuit 96 drive the movable decoration unit 121 according to the movable decoration unit drive data specified by the effect content. That is, the movable decorative unit 121 is driven when a special effect is performed and is exposed to the panel opening 101a of the front panel 10.

The touch sensors 23L and 23R detect that the player's hand has touched (touched) the left character decoration unit 22L or the right character decoration unit 22R, and the detection result is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42 described later. Send.

<Structure of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 52 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 45.

[Design arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table is data that specifies the position of each symbol in each rotation direction of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, and the type of the symbol arranged at each position (hereinafter, symbol code (in FIG. 6). (Refer to the symbol code table)) and defines the correspondence with.

In the symbol arrangement table, when the reel index is detected, the position of the symbol located in the middle region of each reel in the frame of the display window 4 is defined as "0". Then, in each reel, in the order of proceeding in the direction of rotation of the reels (the direction from the symbol position "20" to the symbol position "0" in FIG. 6) with the symbol position "0" as a reference, " "0" to "20" are assigned to each symbol as the symbol position.

That is, by referring to the values of the symbol counters (“0” to “20”) and the symbol arrangement table, they are displayed in the upper region, the middle region, and the lower region of each reel in the frame of the display window 4. The type of symbol can be specified. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 3L is "7", the upper region, the middle region, and the lower region of the left reel 3L in the frame of the display window 4 have the symbol position "8", respectively. The symbol "Rip 2", the symbol "Billy BAR" at the symbol position "7", and the symbol "Rip 1" at the symbol position "6" are displayed.

[Design combination table]
Next, the symbol combination table (Nos. 1 to 5) will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 11. The symbol combination table defines the correspondence between the combination of symbols determined in advance according to the type of privilege, the display combination (storage area), and the number of payouts.

In the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols displayed by the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R along the effective line (center line) matches the combination of symbols specified in the symbol combination table. It is judged as a prize. Then, when it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given benefits such as paying out medals and operating the replay. If the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line does not match any of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, a so-called "loss" occurs. That is, in the present embodiment, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the "loss" is not specified in the symbol combination table, so that the combination of the symbols corresponding to the "loss" is specified. The present invention is not limited to this, and the item of "loss" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly specify "loss".

The various data described in the display combination column in the symbol combination table are data for identifying the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line. The "data" in the display combination column is represented by 1-byte data, and a unique combination of symbols (contents of the display combination) is assigned to each bit in the data.

Further, the data of the "storage area" in the display combination column is data for designating the display combination storage area (see FIG. 46 described later) in which the corresponding display combination is stored. In this embodiment, 29 display combination storage areas are provided. Then, in the present embodiment, display combinations having the same bit pattern (1 byte data pattern) and different contents are managed as different display combinations due to the difference in the "storage area".

The numerical value described in the payout number column in the symbol combination table represents the number of medals to be paid out to the player. In the combination of symbols to which a numerical value of 1 or more is given as the data of the "number of payouts", the same number of medals as the numerical value is paid out.

For example, in the present embodiment, when the number of medals inserted is three and any one of "C_C bell" to "C_B bell 24" is determined as the display combination, 12 medals are paid out. This is done (see FIGS. 8 and 9). Further, for example, when the number of inserted medals is one and any one of "C_C bell" to "C_B bell 24" is determined as the display combination, 15 medals are paid out ( 8 and 9). Further, for example, in the present embodiment, when any one of "C_control bell 1" to "C_control bell 12" is determined as the display combination, even if the number of medals inserted is one, 3 Even if there are medals, one medal is paid out (see FIG. 9).

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, a display combination related to the replay (any of the combinations of symbols related to "C_C lip 1" to "C_billy lip 18" shown in FIGS. 7 and 8) is determined as the display combination. At that time, the replay is activated.

The display combinations related to "R_bell transition 2-1" to "R_bell transition 3-21" shown in the symbol combination table (No. 5) of FIG. 11 are "C_B bell" ("C_B bell 1" to This is a role that is displayed when the symbol combination related to "C_B bell 24") cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line (dropped) (hereinafter referred to as "bell spilled"). As will be described later, the display combinations related to these “R_bell transition 2-1” to “R_bell transition 3-21” are display combinations that trigger the transition of the RT gaming state to the RT1 gaming state ( It is a transition role). That is, when the symbol combination corresponding to any one of "R_bell transition 2-1" to "R_bell transition 3-21" is stopped and displayed on the valid line, the RT game state is RT1 described later. It shifts to the game state.

[Bonus activation table]
Next, the bonus operating table will be described with reference to FIG. The bonus operation time table is stored in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 47), the bonus end number counter, the game possible number counter, and the winning number counter provided in the main RAM 53 when the bonus is activated. Prescribe data.

The game status flag is data for identifying the type of bonus game in operation. In the present embodiment, a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as “BB”) and a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as “RB”) are provided as the types of bonus games. "RB" is a so-called first-class special accessory. The "BB" is called a bonus continuous operation device related to the first-class special bonus, and continuously operates the "RB". Therefore, when "BB" is activated, "RB" is also activated.

Further, in the present embodiment, three types of "BB" ("BB1", "BB2" and "BB3") are provided. Further, in the present embodiment, three types of "RB" ("RB1", "RB2" and "RB3") are provided. Then, when "BB1", "BB2" and "BB3" are in operation, "RB1", "RB2" and "RB3" are continuously operated, respectively.

The bonus end number counter is a counter (data) for managing whether or not the number of medals paid out exceeds a predetermined number that triggers the end of the bonus game. In the present embodiment, "BB1" is activated when the symbol combination (see FIG. 7) corresponding to "C_Don BB" or "C_Red 7" is stopped and displayed on the effective line, and then the specified number "263" is activated. When a medal exceeding "" is paid out, "BB1" is terminated. In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to "C_BAR" (see FIG. 7) is stopped and displayed on the valid line, "BB2" is activated, and then the medals exceeding the specified number "60" are paid out. Then, "BB2" is finished. Furthermore, when the symbol combination corresponding to "C_Billy" (see FIG. 7) is stopped and displayed on the effective line, "BB3" is activated, and then medals exceeding the specified number "14" are paid out. In the case, "BB3" is terminated.

In each of the above-mentioned "BB" operations, first, at the start of the bonus, a numerical value (specified number) specified in the bonus operation table is stored in the bonus end number counter. Then, each time the medal is paid out during the bonus operation, the value of the bonus end number counter is subtracted. Then, when the value of the bonus end number counter is updated to a value less than "0", the operating bonus ends. In the present embodiment, "BB" is started when the symbol combination related to "C_Don BB" is displayed, and "BB" is started when the symbol combination related to "C_Red 7" is displayed. Are both set to "BB1", and both are managed by the same game status flag. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is started when the display of the symbol combination related to "C_Don BB" is triggered by the display of the symbol combination related to "BB" and "C_Red 7". "BB" may be managed by different game state flags.

The playable number counter is a counter (data) for managing the number of remaining games that can be played when the “RB” is activated, that is, the so-called playable number of times. The winning count counter is a counter (data) for managing the number of remaining games that can display the combination of symbols related to winning, that is, the so-called winning count when the “RB” is operated.

[RT transition table]
Next, the RT transition table will be described with reference to FIG. The RT transition table defines the correspondence between the transition condition of the RT gaming state and the RT gaming state of the transition source and the transition destination.

In the present embodiment, four types of RT game states are provided, from the RT0 game state to the RT3 game state, in which the types of internal winning combinations of the replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other. Then, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, the fact that a predetermined internal winning combination has been won, or that the symbol combination related to a specific internal winning combination has been stopped and displayed on the effective line is displayed in the RT game. It is a transition condition between states.

Specifically, when the combination related to "C_Don BB", "C_Red 7" or "C_BAR" as the internal winning combination, that is, the combination related to "BB1" or "BB2" is won, the RT gaming state is It shifts to the RT3 game state. In this case, the RT gaming state of the transition source (before the transition) is one of the RT0 gaming state and the RT2 gaming state.

Further, when the combination related to "C_Billy", that is, the combination related to "BB3" is won as the internal winning combination, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state. In this case, the RT gaming state of the transition source (before the transition) is one of the RT0 gaming state and the RT2 gaming state. Further, when any of the operations of "BB1" to "BB3" is completed, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state. The internal winning combination "C_Don BB" is a specific example of a specific internal winning combination according to the present invention, and the internal winning combination "C_Billy" is a specific example of a special internal winning combination according to the present invention. Is.

Further, when any symbol combination of "C_RT0 Lip 1" to "C_RT0 Lip 10" and "C_Control Bell 1" to "C_Control Bell 4" is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state is RT3. It shifts from the RT game state other than the RT0 game state while carrying over the game state and the bonus combination (“BB3”) related to “C_Billy” to the RT0 game state.

In addition, any combination of symbols "C_bell transition 2-1" to "C_bell transition 2-6" and "C_bell transition 3-1" to "C_bell transition 3-21" can be used. When the stop display is displayed, that is, when the bell is spilled, the RT game state changes from the RT 3 game state and the RT game state other than the RT 0 game state carrying over the bonus combination (“BB3”) related to “C_Billy” to the RT1 game state. Move to.

Further, when any of the symbol combinations of "C_RT2 Lip 1" to "C_RT2 Lip 12" is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state and the bonus combination related to "C_Billy" ("BB3"). It shifts from the RT game state other than the RT0 game state being carried over to the RT2 game state.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) controls the transition of the RT gaming state described above with reference to the RT transition table. Regarding the details of the transition flow of the RT gaming state. Will be described in more detail later with reference to FIG. 53.

[Internal lottery table decision table]
Next, the internal lottery table determination table will be described with reference to FIG. The internal lottery table determination table defines the correspondence between each game state, the number of medals inserted, the internal lottery table, and the number of lottery sets set in each game state.

Specifically, in the general game state (the number of medals inserted is "3"), the internal lottery table for the general game state is used, and "54" is set as the number of lottery. In the RB1 game state (the number of medals inserted is "3"), the internal lottery table for the RB1 game state is used, and "8" is set as the number of lottery. In the RB2 game state (the number of medals inserted is "3"), the internal lottery table for the RB2 game state is used, and "8" is set as the number of lottery. Further, in the RB3 game state (the number of medals inserted is "1"), the internal lottery table for the RB3 game state is used, and "6" is set as the number of lottery.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, the internal lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 22. The internal lottery table defines the correspondence between the data pointer associated with the winning number in each RT gaming state and each RB gaming state and the lottery value when each winning number is determined.

The data pointer is data acquired as a result of lottery performed by referring to the internal lottery table, and is for designating the internal winning combination defined by the internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 23 to 28) described later. It is data. In this embodiment, a small winning combination / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are provided as data pointers.

In addition, the lottery value is defined for each setting (settings 1 to 6) for adjusting the expected value of the internal winning such as a preset bonus or small winning combination. This setting is changed by using, for example, a reset switch (not shown) and a setting key type switch (not shown).

In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 65535) is sequentially subtracted by a lottery value defined corresponding to each winning number. Next, it is determined (internal lottery) whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the result of the subtraction becomes negative at the predetermined winning number (“digits” occur), it means that the winning number has been won, and the data points assigned to the winning number are acquired.

Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the larger the winning number defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the assigned data (that is, the data pointer) is determined. The winning probability of each winning number can be expressed by "the lottery value specified for each winning number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)".

(1) Internal lottery table for general game status (RT0)
15 and 16 are diagrams showing the configuration of the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general gaming state. This internal lottery table for the general gaming state is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). The internal lottery table for the general game state defines the relationship between the data pointers associated with the winning numbers "1" to "54" and their lottery values.

For example, in the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state), the probability of winning the winning number "2" (abbreviated as "F_Don BB + F_weak ice") is "22" with reference to setting 6 of the internal lottery table for the general gaming state. / 65536 ". Then, when the winning number "2" is won, "10" is acquired as the small winning combination / replay data pointer, and "1" is acquired as the bonus data pointer.

The small role / replay data pointer "10" corresponds to the abbreviation "F_weak ice", and the bonus data pointer "1" corresponds to the abbreviation "F_don BB". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 15, the abbreviation corresponding to the winning number "2" from which the small role / replay data pointer "10" and the bonus data pointer "1" are acquired is "F_don BB + F_weak ice". It becomes.

Further, in the internal lottery table for the general game state, for example, the lottery value of the winning number "37" (abbreviation "F_RT2 transition lip 213") to the winning number "40" (abbreviation "F_RT2 transition lip 321") is "0". There is (see FIG. 16). Therefore, when the internal lottery table for the general game state is referred to, the winning numbers "37" to "40" are not won.

In addition, as shown in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table of FIGS. 24 and 25 described later, when the winning numbers "37" to "40" are won, the small winning combination / replay data pointer is ". "5" to "8" are acquired, and the internal winning combination related to "C_RT2 lip 1" to "C_RT2 lip 12" is determined. That is, when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state, the internal winning combination related to "C_RT2 rip 1" to "C_RT2 rip 12" is not determined, and the RT gaming state changes from the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. There is no transition to.

(2) Internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state. The internal lottery table for the RT1 gaming state is a table that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). In the RT1 game state internal lottery table, the relationship between the lottery value and the data pointer in the winning numbers "33" to "41" is defined.

When the RT game state is the RT1 game state, the lottery value specified in the winning numbers "33" to "41" of the internal lottery table for the general game state (see FIGS. 15 and 16) is the RT1 game. The lottery value is changed to the lottery value specified in the winning numbers "33" to "41" of the internal lottery table for the state. At this time, the lottery values of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers "33" to "41" of the internal lottery table for the general game state are not changed and the same lottery values are used.

In the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table, as shown in FIG. 17, the lottery values of the winning numbers "37" to "40" are "2240", respectively. As described above, when any of the winning numbers "37" to "40" is won and any of the small winning combination / replay data pointers "5" to "8" is acquired, the internal winning combination is " The internal winning combination related to "C_RT2 Lip 1" to "C_RT2 Lip 12" is determined. Therefore, when the RT game state is the RT1 game state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to "C_RT2 lip 1" to "C_RT2 lip 12" is determined, and the RT game state changes from the RT1 game state to the RT2 game. It may shift to a state.

(3) Internal lottery table for RT2 gaming state FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table for RT2 gaming state. The internal lottery table for the RT2 gaming state is a table that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). In the RT2 game state internal lottery table, the relationship between the lottery value and the data pointer in the winning numbers "33" to "41" is defined.

When the RT game state is the RT2 game state, the lottery value specified in the winning numbers "33" to "41" of the internal lottery table for the general game state (see FIGS. 15 and 16) is the RT2 game. The lottery value is changed to the lottery value specified in the winning numbers "33" to "41" of the internal lottery table for the state. At this time, the lottery values of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers "33" to "41" of the internal lottery table for the general game state are not changed and the same lottery values are used.

In the RT2 gaming state internal lottery table, as shown in FIG. 18, the lottery values of the winning numbers "34" to "36" are "3500", respectively. If any of the winning numbers "34" to "36" is won and any of the small winning combination / replay data pointers "2" to "4" is acquired, the internal winning combination is "C_RT0 Lip 1" to The internal winning combination related to "C_RT0 Lip 10" is determined. Therefore, when the RT game state is the RT2 game state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to "C_RT0 rip 1" to "C_RT0 rip 10" is determined, and the RT game state changes from the RT2 game state to the RT0 game. It may shift to a state.

(4) Internal lottery table for RT3 gaming state FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table for RT3 gaming state. The internal lottery table for the RT3 gaming state is a table that is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). In the RT3 gaming state internal lottery table, the relationship between the lottery value and the data pointer in the winning numbers "33" to "41" is defined.

When the RT game state is the RT3 game state, the lottery value specified in the winning numbers "33" to "41" of the internal lottery table for the general game state (see FIGS. 15 and 16) is the RT3 game. The lottery value is changed to the lottery value specified in the winning numbers "33" to "41" of the internal lottery table for the state. At this time, the lottery values of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers "33" to "41" of the internal lottery table for the general game state are not changed and the same lottery values are used.

In the RT3 gaming state internal lottery table, as shown in FIG. 19, the lottery values of the winning numbers "34" to "40" are "200", respectively. If any of the winning numbers "34" to "36" is won and any of the small winning combination / replay data pointers "2" to "4" is acquired, the internal winning combination is "C_RT0 Lip 1" to The internal winning combination related to "C_RT0 Lip 10" is determined. In addition, when any of the winning numbers "37" to "40" is won and any of the small winning combination / replay data pointers "5" to "8" is acquired, "C_RT2 Lip 1" is used as the internal winning combination. "-" C_RT2 Lip 12 "is determined as an internal winning combination.

As described above, when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state, the internal winning is related to any of "C_RT0 rip 1" to "C_RT0 rip 10" and "C_RT2 rip 1" to "C_RT2 rip 12". The role may be decided. However, in the present embodiment, as described in the RT transition table of FIG. 13, when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state, "C_RT0 rip 1" to "C_RT0 rip 10" and "C_RT2 rip 1" Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination according to any of "C_RT2 Lip 12" is stopped and displayed on the valid line, the RT gaming state changes from the RT3 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state or the RT2 gaming state. Does not migrate.

(5) Internal lottery table for RB1 gaming state FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table for RB1 gaming state. The internal lottery table for the RB1 gaming state is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is the RB1 gaming state (BB1 gaming state). In the internal lottery table for the RB1 game state, the relationship between the data pointers associated with the winning numbers "1" to "8" and the lottery value is defined. In the present embodiment, the lottery values of the winning numbers defined in the internal lottery table for the RB1 gaming state shown in FIG. 20 are commonly used in the settings 1 to 6.

For example, in the RB1 gaming state (BB1 gaming state), the probability of winning the winning number "1" (abbreviated as "F_BB all bells") is "42300/65536" with reference to the internal lottery table for the RB1 gaming state. .. Then, when the winning number "1" is won, "25" is acquired as a small winning combination / replay data pointer. In the internal lottery table for the RB1 gaming state of the present embodiment, the total lottery value defined for each of the winning numbers "1" to "8" is "65536". That is, in the RB1 game state, the internal winning combination related to the bell always wins.

(6) Internal lottery table for RB2 gaming state FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table for RB2 gaming state. The internal lottery table for the RB2 gaming state is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is the RB2 gaming state (BB2 gaming state). In the internal lottery table for the RB2 game state, the relationship between the data pointers associated with the winning numbers "1" to "8" and the lottery value is defined. In the present embodiment, the lottery value of each winning number defined in the internal lottery table for the RB2 gaming state shown in FIG. 21 is commonly used in the settings 1 to 6.

For example, in the RB2 gaming state (BB2 gaming state), the probability that the winning number "1" (abbreviated as "F_BB all bells") is won by referring to the internal lottery table for the RB2 gaming state is "65536/65536". .. Then, when the winning number "1" is won, "25" is acquired as a small winning combination / replay data pointer. That is, in the present embodiment, in the RB2 game state, the winning number "1" is always won, and the small winning combination / replay data pointer "25" is acquired.

(7) Internal lottery table for RB3 gaming state FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the configuration of an internal lottery table for RB3 gaming state. The internal lottery table for the RB3 gaming state is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is the RB3 gaming state (BB3 gaming state). In the internal lottery table for the RB3 game state, the relationship between the data pointers associated with the winning numbers "1" to "6" and the lottery value is defined. In the present embodiment, the lottery value of each winning number defined in the internal lottery table for the RB2 gaming state shown in FIG. 22 is commonly used in the settings 1 to 6.

For example, in the RB3 gaming state (BB3 gaming state), the probability of winning the winning number "1" (abbreviated as "F_Billy S bell") is "15930/65536" with reference to the internal lottery table for the RB3 gaming state. is there. Then, when the winning number "1" is won, "33" is acquired as a small winning combination / replay data pointer.

In the internal lottery table for the RB3 gaming state of the present embodiment, the total lottery value defined for each of the winning numbers "1" to "6" is "64512". That is, in the RB3 game state, the internal winning combination related to the bell is won with a probability of "64512 / 65536", and it becomes "missing" with a probability of "1024/65536".

[Internal winning combination decision table]
Next, the internal winning combination determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 28. The internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the data pointer and the internal winning combination. That is, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are determined, the internal winning combination is uniquely acquired.

The "internal winning combination" in the internal winning combination determination table is data for identifying a combination of symbols on the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, which allows display along the effective line. The "internal winning combination" is represented by 1-byte data in the same manner as the "display combination" in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 7 to 11, and is a symbol unique to each bit in the 1-byte data. Combinations are assigned.

In addition, the “○” mark in the internal winning combination determination table indicates the internal winning combination to be won in the acquired data pointer. When the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are "0", the content of the "internal winning combination" is "missing", which is the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 7 to 11. Indicates that the display of all symbol combinations specified by is not permitted.

(1) Bonus Internal Winning Combination Determination Table FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the configuration of a bonus internal winning combination determination table. The bonus internal winning combination determination table defines the internal winning combination related to the operation of the bonus game for the bonus data pointers "1" to "4". That is, the bonus internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the bonus data pointer and the internal winning combination related to the operation of the bonus game.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23, for example, when "2" is acquired as the bonus data pointer, the internal winning combination related to "C_red 7" ("BB1") is used as the internal winning combination. Wins.

(2) Small win / replay internal winning combination determination table FIGS. 24 to 28 are diagrams showing the configuration of the small combination / replay internal winning combination determination table. The small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table defines the small winning combination and the internal winning combination related to the replay (replay) for the small combination / replay data pointers "1" to "38". That is, the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the internal winning combination related to the payout of medals or the internal winning combination related to the operation of the replay.

Here, each small winning combination / replay data pointer defined in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table shown in FIGS. 24 to 28 and each small winning combination / replay data pointer are determined. A table summarizing the correspondence with the internal winning combination is shown in FIGS. 29 and 30. This correspondence table defines the correspondence between the small winning combination / replay data pointer, its abbreviation, and the determined internal winning combination.

In the present embodiment, for example, when "2" is acquired as a small winning combination / replay data pointer, "C_C rip 1" to "C_C rip 12" and "C_T rip 1" to " "C_T rip 8", "C_CU rip 1" to "C_CU rip 8" and "C_RT0 rip 1" to "C_RT0 rip 10" are duplicated.

Further, for example, when "21" is acquired as a small winning combination / replay data pointer, "C_C bell", "C_B bell 5", "C_B bell 14", "C_B bell 21" are used as internal winning combinations. , "C_control bell 1" to "C_control bell 12", "R_bell transition 2-1" to "R_bell transition 2-6" and "R_bell transition 3-1" to "R_bell transition 3-1" 3-21 ”is a duplicate win.

[Number selection table for stopping rotation]
Next, the number selection table for stopping the rotation of the cylinder will be described with reference to FIG. 31. The rotation stop number selection table defines the correspondence between the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the rotation stop number. The reel stop number is data used when acquiring various data required in the reel stop initial setting process (see FIG. 226 described later) described later.

The rotation stop number selection table of the present embodiment defines a different rotation stop number for each small combination / replay data pointer. For example, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "3", the rotation stop number "3" is selected.

The rotation stop number selection table of the present embodiment defines a different rotation stop number for each small combination / replay data pointer, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the rotation rotation stop number selection table according to the present invention, the same rotation rotation stop number may be specified for different small winning combination / replay data pointers to reduce data.

[Reel stop initialization table]
Next, the reel stop initial setting table will be described with reference to FIG. The reel stop initial setting table defines the correspondence between the reel stop number and various data used in the pull-in priority table selection process described later and the determination process of the number of sliding pieces of each reel described later. Specifically, the reel stop initial setting table includes a rotation stop number, a pull-in priority table selection table number, a pull-in priority table number, forward push table selection data, forward push table change data, and forward push. The correspondence between the initial table change data and the table selection data at the time of irregular pressing is specified.

The pull-in priority table selection table number and the pull-in priority table number are data used in the pull-in priority table selection process. For example, if the pull-in priority table number corresponding to the turning cylinder stop number is specified in the reel stop initial setting table, the pull-in priority table specified in the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 38 described later) described later is specified. It is possible to acquire data on the priority of the display combination corresponding to the number.

Further, if the pull-in priority table number corresponding to the turning cylinder stop number is not specified in the reel stop initial setting table, the pull-in priority table selection table (see FIG. 37 described later) is referred to and is pulled in. The pull-in priority table number corresponding to the priority table selection table number is determined.

For the forward-pressed table selection data, forward-pressed table change data, and forward-pressed table change initial data, a stop table (see FIGS. 33 to 35 described later) to be referred to when forward-pressed is performed is specified. It is the data for. In addition, the "forward push" referred to in this specification is a stop operation when the first stop operation (the first stop operation is performed) is performed on the left reel 3L, and specifically, " Corresponds to the pressing order of "left middle right" and "left and right middle".

The irregular pressing table selection data is data for designating a stop table (see FIG. 36 described later) to be referred to when an irregular pressing is performed. The "irregular push" referred to in the present specification is a stop operation when the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R, and is "middle left / right", "middle right / left", and "middle right / left". Corresponds to the pressing order of "right middle left" and "right middle left".

In the present embodiment, as described above, basically, after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped at a predetermined position within 190 msec. In this reel stop operation, in the reel on which the stop operation is performed, any one of the number of sliding pieces "0" to "4" is added to the value of the symbol counter of the reel when the stop operation is detected. Then, the symbol position corresponding to the value obtained by the addition is determined as the symbol position for stopping the rotation of the reel (this is referred to as a "scheduled stop position"). The symbol position corresponding to the value of the symbol counter of the reel when the stop operation is detected is the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel is started, and this is referred to as the "stop start position".

That is, the number of sliding pieces is the amount of rotation of the predetermined reel from the detection of the stop operation on the predetermined reel by the stop switch 17S until the rotation of the predetermined reel is stopped. In other words, the number of symbols passing through the middle region of the predetermined reel in the display window 4 during the period from the detection of the stop operation on the predetermined reel by the stop switch 17S to the stop of the rotation of the predetermined reel. is there. This is grasped by the value of the symbol counter updated after the stop operation by the stop switch 17S is detected.

With reference to the stop table described later, the number of sliding pieces is acquired according to the stop start position of each reel. In the present embodiment, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the stop table, but this is tentative, and the scheduled stop position of the reel is not immediately determined by the acquired number of sliding pieces.

Further, in the present embodiment, when there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces than the number of sliding pieces (hereinafter referred to as “sliding piece number determination data”) acquired based on the stop table described later (see FIG. 33 described later). , The number of sliding pieces is changed with reference to the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 38 described later) described later. Then, the sliding piece number determination data is used to determine the search order when comparing the priorities of each symbol from the stop start position to the symbol position four ahead, which is the maximum number of sliding pieces.

In the present embodiment, different stop tables are used according to the pressing order of the stop buttons for forward pressing and irregular pressing. Specifically, in the case of forward pressing, the first stop table for forward pressing (see FIG. 33 described later) and the second and third stop tables for forward pressing (see FIG. 35 described later) will be described later. See) and. On the other hand, in the case of irregular pressing, the irregular pressing stop table described later (see FIG. 36 described later) is referred to.

[Stop table for first stop when pressing forward]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the stop table for the first stop at the time of forward pressing will be described. The first stop table for forward pressing shown in FIG. 33 is a stop table that is referred to when the forward pressing table selection data is "01". The stop table for the first stop at the time of forward pressing defines the correspondence between the stop start positions "0" to "20" of the left reel 3L and the slip piece number determination data and the change status.

For example, if the stop start position of the left reel 3L is "15", the slip piece number determination data becomes "0" and the change status becomes "1". The change status is used when referring to the forward press control change table (see FIG. 34 described later) described later.

[Control change table when pressing forward]
Next, the control change table at the time of forward pressing will be described with reference to FIG. 34. The forward press control change table shown in FIG. 34 is a change table that is referred to when the forward press table change data is "00". The forward push control change table defines the correspondence between the change target position (the position where the left reel 3L is scheduled to stop), the change status, the change status, and the second and third stop table numbers for forward push.

For example, if the change status acquired based on the first stop table for forward pressing (see FIG. 33) is "1" and the planned stop position of the left reel 3L is "15", the change status is "15". It becomes "0", and the stop table number for the second and third stops at the time of forward pressing becomes "12". If the change status and the stop table number for the second and third stops at the time of forward push are not registered in the target position in the control change table at the time of forward push, the stop table number is not changed.

[Stop table for 2nd and 3rd stop when pushing forward and stop table when pushing irregularly]
Next, the second and third stop tables for forward pressing and the stop table for irregular pressing will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. The stop table for the second and third stops at the time of forward pressing and the stop table at the time of irregularity define 1 byte of stop data according to each of the symbol positions "0" to "20".

The second and third stop tables for forward pressing shown in FIG. 35 are referred to when the second and third stop table numbers for forward pressing are "08". Further, the irregular pressing stop table shown in FIG. 36 is referred to when the irregular pressing table selection data is “07”.

Is the stop data specified in each stop table of the second and third stop tables at the time of forward pressing and the stop table at the time of irregularity appropriate as the position where the symbol position associated with itself stops the rotation of the reel? Has information on whether or not. Then, this stop data provides information on whether or not the corresponding symbol position is appropriate as a position to stop the rotation of the reel, the bits corresponding to the "A line" column and the "B line" column in each stop table. Assign to the bit corresponding to. Further, the stop data is defined by assigning information on which of these two types of information should be adopted to the bits corresponding to the "line change" column in each stop table.

That is, the second and third stop tables for forward pressing and the stop table for irregular time specify a plurality of methods for determining the position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped. Therefore, even if the stop start position is the same symbol position, the position where the reel rotation is stopped can be changed based on the stop position at the time of the first stop. By adopting such a configuration, information can be compressed.

The data for determining the number of sliding pieces is determined as follows. First, it is specified which of the eight bit strings (the data in the leftmost column in the figure corresponds to bit 1) constituting the stop data is referred to according to the type of the stop button in which the stop operation is detected. For example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, the column of "middle reel A line data" of bit 4 is specified.

Then, with reference to the designated bit string, each symbol position from the stop start position to the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces is sequentially searched for whether or not "1" is defined as the corresponding data. As a result of this search, the difference from the stop start position to the symbol position for which "1" is defined as the corresponding data is calculated, and the difference is used as the sliding piece number determination data.

Whether or not to change the reference bit string from the "A line" column to the "B line" column is determined by referring to the "line change" column, and "1" is specified in the data corresponding to the stop start position. It is determined by whether or not it has been done. Then, when it is determined to change the line, the column of "B line" is specified thereafter, and the above search is performed.

[Pull-in priority table selection table]
Next, the pull-in priority table selection table will be described with reference to FIG. 37. The pull-in priority table selection table defines the correspondence between the combination of the pull-in priority table selection table number and the stop button pressing order and the pull-in priority table number in each combination. The attraction priority table number is data for acquiring information regarding the priority of the display combination defined in the attraction priority table (see FIG. 38 described later) described later.

When the left reel 3L is first stopped, the data in the "left reel first stop" column in the pull-in priority table selection table is referred to. For example, when the left reel 3L is first stopped and the attraction priority table selection table number is "1", the attraction priority table number "00" is acquired. After that, when the stop button of the middle reel 3C is pressed at the second stop, the pull-in priority table number is changed from "00" to "05". On the other hand, when the left reel 3L is stopped first and the pull-in priority table selection table number is "1", when the stop button of the right reel 3R is pressed at the second stop, the pull-in priority table number is changed to "1". Change from "00" to "06".

If the pull-in priority table number is not registered at the target position in the pull-in priority table selection table, the number shown in the right column of the right reel first stop column is the pull-in priority table number. Is obtained as. For example, when the left reel 3L is stopped first and the pull-in priority table selection table number is "0", when the stop button of the right reel 3R is pressed at the second stop, the pull-in priority table is placed at the target position. The number is not registered. Therefore, in this case, the column on the right side of the column of the first stop of the right reel corresponding to the attraction priority table selection table number "0" is referred to, and "03" is acquired as the attraction priority table number.

[Pull-in priority table]
Next, the pull-in priority table will be described with reference to FIG. 38. The pull-in priority table defines the correspondence between the pull-in data for each storage area type in each of the pull-in priority table numbers "00" to "06" and the predetermined priority.

The pull-in priority table is used to search whether or not a more appropriate number of slip pieces exists in addition to the number of slip pieces obtained based on the stop table. The priority order is data that defines the order of priority to be stopped and displayed (pulled in) among the types of symbol combinations related to winning. Further, each of the pull-in data is 1 as in the "internal winning combination" in the internal winning combination determination table shown in FIGS. 23 to 28 and the "display combination" in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 7 to 11. It is represented by byte data, and a unique combination of symbols is assigned to each bit in the 1-byte data.

In the present embodiment, first, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the above-mentioned first stop table for forward push (see FIG. 33). However, if there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces, the number is changed to the appropriate number of sliding pieces. That is, in the present embodiment, the more appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined based on the priority of the combination of symbols that are allowed to be stopped by the internal winning combination, regardless of the number of sliding pieces acquired by the stop table.

In the present embodiment, in the pull-in priority table, the stop display (pull-in) of the combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination having the higher priority is the combination of the symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination having the lower priority. It is given priority over the stop display.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, not only the priority of the internal winning combination is different depending on the attraction priority table number, but also the number of priority divisions is different. Specifically, when the pull-in priority table numbers are "00", "01", and "04", the number of priority divisions is 4, and the pull-in priority table numbers are "02" and "05". If is, the number of priority divisions is set to 3. Then, when the pull-in priority table numbers are "03" and "06", the number of priority divisions is set to 1.

Here, in order to simplify the explanation, the priority order when the pull-in priority table number is "00" will be described, and the description of the priority in the other pull-in priority table numbers will be omitted. When the pull-in priority table number is "00", the priority "1" includes "C_confirmed cherry 3", "C_confirmed cherry 4", "C_confirmed cherry 7" to "C_confirmed cherry 10", and " The pull-in data corresponding to "C_T bell 1" to "C_T bell 18", "C_CU bell 1" to "C_CU bell 12", "C_C bell", and "C_Billy lip 1" to "C_Billy lip 18" is specified. ..

When the pull-in priority table number is "00", the priority "2" includes "C_CD ice 1" to "C_CD ice 8", "C_CU ice 1" to "C_CU ice 2", and "C_C ice 1". ~ "C_C Ice 4", "C_Definite Cherry 1" ~ "C_Definite Cherry 12", "C_T Bell 1" ~ "C_T Bell 8", "C_CU Bell 1" ~ "C_CU Bell 12", "C_C Bell", For "C_Billy Lip 1" to "C_Billy Lip 18", "C_CU Lip 1" to "C_CU Lip 8", "C_T Lip 1" to "C_T Lip 6", and "C_C Lip 1" to "C_C Lip 12" Corresponding pull-in data is specified.

When the pull-in priority table number is "00", the priority "3" includes "C_special role 1" to "C_special role 2", "C_CD ice 1" to "C_CD ice 8", and "C_CU ice". 1 "to" C_CU ice 2 "," C_B ice 1 "to" C_B ice 2 "," C_C ice 1 "to" C_C ice 4 "," C_confirmed cherry 1 "to" C_confirmed cherry 12 "," C_strong Cherry 1 "to" C_strong cherry 12 "," C_weak cherry 1 "to" C_weak cherry 4 "," C_T bell 1 "to" C_T bell 8 "," C_CU bell 1 "to" C_CU bell 12 "," "C_C Bell", "C_Billy Lip 1" to "C_Billy Lip 18", "C_CU Lip 1" to "C_CU Lip 8", "C_T Lip 1" to "C_T Lip 8", and "C_C Lip 1" to "C_C" The pull-in data corresponding to "Rip 12" is defined.

When the pull-in priority table number is "00", the priority "4" includes "C_Billy Lip 1" to "C_Billy Lip 18", "C_T Lip 1" to "C_T Lip 8", and "C_C Lip 1". -The pull-in data corresponding to "C_C Lip 12", "C_Billy", "C_BAR", "C_Red 7", and "C_Don BB" is specified.

In the present embodiment, for example, when the attraction priority table number is "00", the priority "1" includes "C_confirmed cherry 3", "C_confirmed cherry 4", and "C_confirmed cherry 7". ~ "C_confirmed cherry 10" is defined, and "C_confirmed cherry 1" to "C_confirmed cherry 12" are defined in the priority "2". That is, some internal winning combinations are defined in both priority "1" and priority "2". As described above, the internal winning combination defined in both the priority "1" and the priority "2" has a higher priority than the internal winning combination defined only in the priority "1". As a result, the number of priorities can be reduced.

[Search order table]
Next, the search sequence table will be described with reference to FIG. 39. The search order table is an order in which the number of sliding pieces is preferentially applied from a predetermined numerical range (“0” to “4” when the maximum number of sliding pieces is 4) (hereinafter, “search order””. ) Is specified.

The search order table defines the slip piece number determination data obtained based on the above-mentioned stop table and the search order thereof. That is, in the present embodiment, the order of numerical values to be applied preferentially is determined based on the number of sliding pieces determination data. Further, the search order table is provided on the assumption that there are a plurality of sliding pieces having the same priority, and is configured to apply the one having a higher search order.

In this embodiment, as described in the priority pull-in control process of FIG. 236 described later, each numerical value is searched sequentially from the lower search order "5" of the search order table, and corresponds to the search order "1". Priority is given to the number of sliding pieces from the numerical value to be applied.

[Game lock lottery table]
(1) Outline of Game Lock First, before explaining the game lock lottery table, the contents of the game lock performed in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

In the present embodiment, the game lock is generated when a predetermined operation is performed during the game in the general game state or the RT1 to RT3 game states. While the game lock is occurring, even if a throw-in operation or a stop operation is performed, the detection is treated as invalid or delayed.

In the present embodiment, nine types of game locks, "game lock 1" to "game lock 9", are prepared as game locks. The "game lock 1" is performed when the start lever 16 is operated (lever on), and a game lock of 49000 msec is generated. The "game lock 2" is executed triggered by the first stop operation, and a game lock of 51000 msec is generated. The "game lock 3" is executed triggered by the second stop operation, and a game lock of 51000 msec is generated. The "game lock 4" is executed triggered by the third stop operation, and a game lock of 51000 msec is generated.

The "game lock 5" is performed at the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and a game lock of 3000 msec is generated. Then, while the "game lock 5" is being generated, the first reel effect using the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is executed.

In the first reel effect, first, all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are vibrated for 1000 msec, and then the right reel 3R is forwardly rotated for 1000 msec at a rotation speed slower than the rotation speed during normal operation. Next, all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are vibrated for 1000 msec to end the first reel effect. When the first reel effect is completed, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R rotate forward at the rotation speed during normal operation. The "vibration" of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R means that the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are vibrating by periodically repeating the forward rotation and the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R at high speed. It is an action to show.

The "game lock 6" is performed at the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and a game lock of 5000 msec is generated. Then, while the "game lock 6" is being generated, a second reel effect using the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is executed.

In the second reel effect, first, the same reel effect as the first reel effect is executed. Next, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R are forwardly rotated for 1000 msec at a rotation speed slower than the rotation speed during normal operation. After that, all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are vibrated for 1000 msec to end the second reel production. When the second reel effect is completed, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R rotate forward at the rotation speed during normal operation.

The "game lock 7" is executed at the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and a game lock of 7,000 msec is generated. Then, while the "game lock 7" is being generated, a third reel effect using the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is executed.

In the third reel effect, first, the same reel effect as the second reel effect is executed. Next, all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are forwardly rotated for 1000 msec at a rotation speed slower than the rotation speed during normal operation. After that, all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are vibrated for 1000 msec to end the third reel production. When the third reel effect is completed, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R rotate forward at the rotation speed during normal operation.

The "game lock 8" is performed at the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and a game lock of 10000 msec is generated. Then, while the "game lock 8" is being generated, a fourth reel effect using the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is executed.

In the fourth reel effect, first, the same reel effect as the third reel effect is executed. Next, all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are reversely rotated for 3000 msec at the rotation speed during normal operation, and the fourth reel effect is completed. When the fourth reel effect is completed, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R rotate forward at the rotation speed during normal operation.

The "game lock 9" is executed when the start lever 16 is operated (lever on), and a game lock of 6000 msec is generated. During the generation of "Game Lock 9", a fifth reel effect using the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is executed. In the fifth reel effect, all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are vibrated for 6000 msec.

The types of the various game locks described above are selected by a lottery process using the various game lock lottery tables described later. Specifically, in the game lock lottery process of the present embodiment, basically, a random number value for production extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values "0 to 65535" (random number value 1 for production described later, random number denominator). = 65536) is sequentially subtracted by a lottery value specified according to each game lock type in various game lock lottery tables described later. Then, the lottery is performed by determining whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). That is, the type of the game lock when the result of the subtraction is less than 0 is the type of the winning game lock.

(2) Configuration of Game Lock Lottery Table Next, the game lock lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42. In this embodiment, three types of lottery tables (game lock lottery tables A, B, and C) are provided as the game lock lottery table. Each game lock lottery table is a lottery of a game lock type (game lock type) that wins according to a winning number determined by an internal lottery during a predetermined RT game state (general game state or RT1 to RT3 game state). Specify the value.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing the configuration of the game lock lottery table A. The game lock lottery table A defines a lottery value of "game lock 9" when the winning number is "33" (abbreviation "F_normal lip"). In the present embodiment, when the winning number is "33" and a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute "Game Lock 9", as shown in FIG. 40, "Game Lock 9" is , Win (execute) with a probability of "64/65536".

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing the configuration of the game lock lottery table B. The game lock lottery table B defines the lottery values of "game lock 1" to "game lock 4" when the winning number is "8" (abbreviation "F_Don BB + F_special role 1"). For example, when the winning number is "8", as shown in FIG. 41, "Game Lock 1" wins with a probability of "739/65536".

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the configuration of the game lock lottery table C. The game lock lottery table C defines the lottery values of "game lock 4" to "game lock 8" corresponding to each winning number. For example, when the winning number is "1" (abbreviated as "F_Don BB"), as shown in FIG. 42, "Game Lock 5" wins with a probability of "6144/65536".

If the winning number is "0" (missing), the random number denominator is changed to "4294967296 (65536 squared)" in the game lock lottery process (see FIG. 225 described later) described later. Therefore, when the winning number is "0" (missing), as shown in FIG. 42, the "game lock 4" wins with a probability of "13742/42949677296".

[Output condition table]
Next, the output condition table will be described with reference to FIG. 43. The output condition table includes output conditions such as when the "BB"("BB1","BB2") and "RB"("BB3") are in operation and at the end, and the jackpot signal "1" to the jackpot signal "3". Specify the correspondence with the on / off state.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, the jackpot signal “1” is turned on when the “BB” (“BB1”, “BB2”) is activated. As a result, the jackpot signal "1" is transmitted to the external hall computer or the calling device 100. Then, at the end of "BB" ("BB1", "BB2"), the jackpot signal "1" is turned off.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "RB" ("BB3") is activated, the jackpot signal "2" is turned on. As a result, the jackpot signal "2" is transmitted to the external hall computer or the calling device 100. Then, at the end of "RB" ("BB3"), the jackpot signal "2" is turned off. Further, when the jackpot signal "3" is on, the jackpot signal "3" is turned off. The jackpot signal "3" is turned on when the value of the output counter (see FIG. 44) described later becomes "0".

[Subtraction condition table]
Next, the subtraction condition table will be described with reference to FIG. The subtraction condition table defines the correspondence between the stop order and the determination result of whether or not the subtraction condition is satisfied for each value of the output counter. The "○" mark in the subtraction condition table indicates that the subtraction condition is satisfied.

In the present embodiment, the value of the output counter is subtracted by "1" when it is determined that the subtraction condition is satisfied by referring to the subtraction condition table. Basically, when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state, "3" is set in the output counter.

For example, when the value of the output counter is "3" and the stop order is "right, left, middle", it is determined that the subtraction condition is satisfied. As a result, the value of the output counter is subtracted from "3" by "1". On the other hand, when the value of the output counter is "3", if the stop order is other than "right, left, middle", the subtraction condition is not satisfied, so that the value of the output counter is not changed from "3".

[Prize winning operation flag data table for symbols]
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table will be described. The symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table defines the correspondence between the reel type and the data of the internal winning combination that can be displayed according to the symbol of each reel displayed on the effective line. That is, by referring to the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table, it is possible to determine the internal winning combination that can be displayed at that time. The symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table is provided corresponding to the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 7 to 11).

For example, when the symbol "Don" is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the left reel 3L, it can be displayed in the storage areas 1 to 29 corresponding to the symbol code "00000001" (Don) in the reel type "left". "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to the internal winning combination. The data defined in the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table is logically producted and stored in the data stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 50 described later) described later.

<Structure of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, the configurations of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 53 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 52. Although description is omitted here, storage areas for various control data, various flags, various counters, etc. used in the above-mentioned various reel effects (various game locks) are also provided in the main RAM 53.

[Display combination storage area]
First, the configuration of the display combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, each display combination storage area is composed of display combination storage areas 1 to 29 represented by 1 byte of data.

In each of the display combination storage areas 1 to 29, when "1" is set in a predetermined bit (when it is stored), the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined bit is displayed on the valid line. Is shown. On the other hand, when all the bits are "0", it indicates that the combination of the symbols related to the winning and the combination of the symbols that triggers the transition to the RT gaming state are not displayed on the valid line.

Further, the main RAM 53 is provided with an internal winning combination storage area (not shown). The internal winning combination storage area is configured in the same manner as the display combination storage area shown in FIG. When "1" is set in a plurality of bits in the internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 29, the display of the combination of symbols corresponding to each bit is permitted. Further, when all the bits are "0", the content of the internal winning combination is "missing".

Further, the main RAM 53 is provided with a carry-over combination storage area (not shown). Further, the carry-over combination storage area is composed of the storage area 1 of the display combination storage area shown in FIG. As a result of the internal lottery, when any of "C_Don BB", "C_Red 7", "C_BAR" and "C_Billy" is determined as the internal winning combination, the internal winning combination is stored as the carry-over role. Stored in the area. The carry-over combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area is not cleared until the corresponding symbol combination (for example, "Don"-"Don"-"Don" of "C_Don BB") is displayed on the valid line. Is held in. Further, while the carry-over combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area, the carry-over combination is stored in the internal winning combination storage area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery.

[Game status flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 47. Each of the game state flag storage areas is composed of game state flag storage areas 1 and 2 represented by 1-byte data. In the present embodiment, in the game state flag, a unique bonus type or RT type is assigned to each bit of the game state flag storage areas 1 and 2.

When "1" is stored (standing) in a predetermined bit in each of the game state flag storage areas 1 and 2, the bonus game or RT corresponding to the predetermined bit is being operated. Is shown. For example, when "1" is stored in bit 0 of the game state flag storage area 1, "BB1" ("C_Don BB" or "C_Red 7") is being operated and the game state is changed. BB1 Indicates that the game is in a gaming state.

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 48. The operation stop button storage area stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

For example, when the left stop button 17L is the stop button pressed this time, that is, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, when the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, "1" is stored in bit 4. The main CPU 51 distinguishes between the stop button pressed this time and the stop button that has not yet been pressed, based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

[Press order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 49. The press order storage area stores a press order flag consisting of 1 byte. In the pressing order flag, each bit is assigned the type of pressing order of the stop button. For example, when the pressing order of the stop buttons is "left middle right", "1" is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 50. In the symbol code storage area, the symbol code (symbol code storage area 1) of the reel that has been stopped most recently and the displayable combination (symbol code storage area 2-29) are stored for each effective line. Reel. After all the reels are stopped, the symbol code corresponding to the display combination is stored in the symbol code storage areas 2 to 29.

In the present embodiment, when the stop control position is determined, the winning operation flag data corresponding to the symbol (code) of the stop control position is read from the symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table (see FIG. 45), and the winning operation flag is read. The data is logically producted with the data already stored in the symbol code storage area. Then, the logically stacked data is stored in the symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 50. When a plurality of effective lines are provided, the same number of symbol code storage areas as the number of effective lines are provided.

[Retract priority data storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pull-in priority data storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 51. The pull-in priority data storage area includes a pull-in priority data storage area for the left reel, a pull-in priority data storage area for the middle reel, and a pull-in priority data storage area for the right reel. That is, the pull-in priority data storage area is provided with a priority data storage area for each type of reel.

In each attraction priority data storage area, the attraction priority data determined according to each symbol position "0" to "20" of the corresponding reel is stored. In the present embodiment, by referring to the pull-in priority data storage area, it is searched whether or not a more appropriate number of sliding pieces exists in addition to the number of sliding pieces determined based on the above-mentioned stop table.

The content of the priority pull-in data stored in the pull-in priority data storage area differs depending on the type of the pull-in priority table number in the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 38) referred to when determining the pull-in priority data. .. Further, the pull-in priority data indicates that the larger the value, the higher the priority.

By referring to the pull-in priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. That is, the symbol whose highest value is determined as the attraction priority data is the symbol with the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the pull-in priority data indicates the order between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. When there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the pull-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the search order defined in the above-mentioned search order table (see FIG. 39).

[Game lock flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the game lock flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 52. Each of the game lock flag storage areas is composed of game lock flag storage areas 1 and 2 represented by 1-byte data. In the present embodiment, in the game lock flag, a unique lock number is assigned to each bit of the game lock flag storage areas 1 and 2.

In the present embodiment, when the game lock type is determined with reference to the game lock lottery table (see FIGS. 40 to 42), the lock number corresponding to the game lock type is stored in the game lock flag storage area. .. For example, when the determined game lock type is "game lock 1", "1" is stored in bit 0 of the game lock flag storage area 1.

<Various game states>
[Game state transition flow]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the transition flow of the gaming state between the “RT0 gaming state” to the “RT3 gaming state” and the “BB gaming state” controlled by the main CPU 51 will be described.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, four types of gaming states of "RT0 gaming state (general gaming state)" to "RT3 gaming state" are provided as RT gaming states. Then, the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) controls the transition between the “RT0 gaming state” to the “RT3 gaming state” and the “BB gaming state” with reference to the RT transition table (see FIG. 13).

First, at the time of shipment of the pachislot machine 1 or at the end of the "BB", the gaming state becomes the "RT0 gaming state". Next, in the "RT0 game state", when the combination of the symbols related to the "bell spill" is displayed on the effective line, the game state shifts from the "RT0 game state" to the "RT1 game state". The combination of symbols related to "bell spill" in the present embodiment is "R_bell transition 2-1" to "R_bell transition 2-6" and "R_bell transition 3-1" shown in FIG. It is a combination (display combination) of the symbols pertaining to any of "R_bell transition 3-21".

Further, in the "RT1 game state", when the combination of symbols related to "RT2 rip" (any of "C_RT2 rip 1" to "C_RT2 rip 12" in FIGS. 7 and 8) is displayed on the valid line. The game state shifts from the "RT1 game state" to the "RT2 game state". Then, in the "RT1 game state", when the combination of symbols related to the "failure bell" (any of "C_control bell 1" to "C_control bell 4" in FIG. 9) is displayed on the valid line. , The gaming state shifts from "RT1 gaming state" to "RT0 gaming state".

In the "RT2 game state (ART state)", when the combination of symbols related to the "failure bell" is displayed on the valid line, the game state shifts from the "RT2 game state" to the "RT0 game state". Further, in the "RT2 game state", when the combination of the symbols related to "bell spill" is displayed on the effective line, the game state shifts from the "RT2 game state" to the "RT1 game state".

When the internal winning combination related to the operation of "BB" (any of "C_Don BB", "C_Red 7" and "C_BAR") is being carried over in "RT0 gaming state" to "RT2 gaming state". Shifts the gaming state from the current gaming state to the "RT3 gaming state". Then, when the combination of symbols related to the operation of "BB" is displayed on the effective line, the game state becomes "BB game state". After that, when the operation of "BB" is completed, the gaming state shifts from the "BB gaming state" to the "RT0 gaming state".

If "BB" ("BB3") related to "C_Billy" is being carried over among the internal winning combinations related to the operation of "BB", the gaming state is changed from the current gaming state to the "RT0 gaming state". To move to. Then, when the combination of the symbols related to "C_Billy" is displayed on the effective line, the game state shifts to the "BB game state". After that, when the operation of "C_Billy" is completed, the game state changes from the "BB game state" to the "RT0 game state".

In the present embodiment, in order to display the combination of symbols related to the "bell" such as "C_C bell" on the effective line when the execution of ART is determined in the "RT0 gaming state (general gaming state)". By not notifying the stop order (display auxiliary information) of, it waits for the combination of symbols related to "bell spill" to be displayed on the effective line naturally. Then, when the combination of symbols related to "bell spill" is displayed on the effective line, the gaming state shifts from "RT0 gaming state" to "RT1 gaming state". In the present embodiment, when the execution of ART is determined in the "RT0 game state", the stop order (display auxiliary information) for displaying the combination of symbols related to "bell spill" on the effective line. May be displayed (notified) on the liquid crystal display device 11.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the execution of ART is determined in the "RT1 game state", the stop order (display auxiliary information) for displaying the combination of symbols related to the "RT2 lip" on the effective line. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Then, when the combination of symbols related to the "RT2 lip" is displayed on the effective line, the gaming state shifts from the "RT1 gaming state" to the "RT2 gaming state".

In the present embodiment, the winning probability of the winning combination related to the replay in the "RT0 gaming state" and the "RT1 gaming state" is lower than that in the "RT2 gaming state". Therefore, in the present embodiment, the "RT0 gaming state" and the "RT1 gaming state" are the low RT gaming states, and the "RT2 gaming state" is the high RT gaming state.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, the gaming state shifts directly from the "RT1 gaming state" to the "RT2 gaming state", but directly from the "RT0 gaming state" to the "RT2 gaming state". The game state does not shift. To shift the gaming state from "RT0 gaming state" to "RT2 gaming state", first, the gaming state shifts from "RT0 gaming state" to "RT1 gaming state", and then the gaming state is "RT1 gaming state". To shift to "RT2 game state". That is, the transition route from the low RT gaming state to the high RT gaming state according to the present invention includes a route for direct transition and a route for indirectly (stepping through a predetermined step).

[Correspondence table between internal winning combination and stop order]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the stop order will be described. FIG. 54 is a correspondence table between the internal winning combination (small winning combination / replay data pointer) and the stop order, and shows the display combination corresponding to the combination of the internal winning combination (small winning combination / replay data pointer) and the stop order. Indicates the type.

The "RT0 transition lip" described in FIG. 54 is a display combination (transition combination: "C_RT0 lip 1" to "C_RT0 lip 10") in which the transition of the gaming state to the "RT0 gaming state" (general gaming state) is determined. ) Is shown. Further, the "RT2 transition lip" indicates a display combination ("C_RT2 lip 1" to "C_RT2 lip 12") in which the transition of the gaming state to the "RT2 gaming state (ART state)" is determined. Further, the "normal lip" indicates a display combination related to the re-game that is not related to the transition between the "RT0 game state" and the "RT2 game state".

Further, the "C_CU bell" shown in FIG. 54 has a symbol "bell" along a cross-up line (a line connecting the lower region of the left reel 3L, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the upper region of the right reel 3R). Indicates a display combination (“C_CU bell 1” to “C_CU bell 12”) that is stopped and displayed. Further, "C_C bell" indicates a display combination ("C_C bell") in which the symbol "bell" is stopped and displayed along the center line (effective line).

Further, “C_control bell 1-4” shown in FIG. 54 indicates a display combination (“C_control bell 1” to “C_control bell 4”) in which the number of payouts is “1”. Further, the "C_B bell" is a display function in which the symbol "bell" is stopped and displayed along the bottom line (the line connecting the lower region of the left reel 3L, the lower region of the middle reel 3C, and the lower region of the right reel 3R). "C_B bell 1" to "C_B bell 24") are shown. Further, "C_B bell / R_bell transition eye 2" and "C_B bell / R_bell transition eye 2" are displayed as a stop display when "C_B bell" cannot be stopped (missed) ("R_". "Bell transition 2-1" to "R_bell transition 2-6" and "R_bell transition 3-1" to "R_bell transition 3-21") are shown.

In the present embodiment, the push order is different for the success or failure of the stop display of the combination of various symbols related to "RT0 transition lip" and "RT2 transition lip" and the stop display of the combination of various symbols related to "bell". Set.

For example, when the data pointer for small role / replay is "2", "C_C rip 1" to "C_C rip 12", "C_T rip 1" to "C_T rip 8", and "C_CU rip 8" are used as internal winning combinations. 1 ”to“ C_CU Lip 8 ”and“ C_RT0 Lip 1 ”to“ C_RT0 Lip 10 ”will win. In this case, "normal rip" ("C_C rip 1" to "C_C rip 10", "C_T rip", provided that the stop order by pressing the stop button is "left middle right" or "left and right middle". The combination of symbols related to "1" to "C_T lip 8", "C_CU lip 1" to "C_CU lip 8") is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the stop order is "middle left / right", "middle right / left", "right / left / middle" or "right / middle / left", the "RT0 transition lip" ("C_RT0 lip 1" to "C_RT0 lip 10") The combination of symbols related to (any)) is stopped and displayed.

If the data pointer for the small role / replay is "5", the internal winning combination is "C_C rip 1" to "C_C rip 12", "C_T rip 1" to "C_T rip 8", and "C_CU rip 8". "1" to "C_CU lip 8" and "C_RT2 lip 1" to "C_RT2 lip 12" are winning. In this case, a combination of symbols related to "RT2 transition lip" (any of "C_RT2 lip 1" to "C_RT2 lip 12"), provided that the stop order by pressing the stop button is "middle left and right". Is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if the stop order is "left middle right", "left and right middle", "middle right left", "right middle left" or "right middle left", "normal lip" ("C_C lip 1" to "C_C" The combination of symbols related to "Rip 10", "C_T Rip 1" to "C_T Rip 8", or "C_CU Rip 1" to "C_CU Rip 8") is stopped and displayed.

That is, a game that is advantageous to the player because the player executes the stop order surrounded by the thick solid line in FIG. 54 set in each of the small role / replay data pointers "2" to "8". It becomes possible to move to the state. In addition, the case of "shifting to an advantageous gaming state" here means all cases where the gaming state finally shifts to the "RT2 gaming state" (ART state). In the present embodiment, as shown in the RT transition table of FIG. 13, in order to shift the gaming state from the "RT0 gaming state" to the "RT2 gaming state", it is necessary to go through the "RT1 gaming state". This "RT1 gaming state" is not included in the "advantageous gaming state" because it is a low RT (the probability that the internal winning combination related to the re-game will win is low) as in the "RT0 gaming state".

If the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "21", the internal winning combination is "C_C bell", "C_B bell 5", "C_B bell 14", "C_B bell 21", "C_control bell". 1 "to" C_control bell 12 "," R_bell transition 2-1 "to" R_bell transition 2-6 "and" R_bell transition 3-1 "to" R_bell transition 3-21 " Win. In this case, the combination of symbols related to "C_C bell" is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order by pressing the stop button is "middle left / right" or "middle right / left" (first stop order). .. As a result, 12 medals (predetermined number) are paid out. In addition, "C_C bell" shows a specific example of the 1st predetermined role which concerns on this invention.

On the other hand, in the above case, when the stop order is "left middle right" or "left and right middle" (second stop order), if the stop button pressing timing for the rotating reel is a predetermined timing (correct answer), The combination of symbols related to "C_B bell" (any of "C_B bell 5", "C_B bell 14" and "C_B bell 21") is stopped and displayed. In addition, "C_B bell" (any one of "C_B bell 5", "C_B bell 14" and "C_B bell 21") shows a specific example of the 2nd predetermined role which concerns on this invention. However, if the timing of pressing the stop button on the rotating reel is other than the predetermined timing (incorrect answer), "R_bell transition 2" or "R_bell transition 3" ("R_bell transition 2-1"). -A combination of symbols according to any one of "R_bell transition 2-6" and "R_bell transition 3-1" to "R_bell transition 3-21") is stopped and displayed.

Therefore, when the stop order is "left middle right" or "left and right middle" (second stop order), if the stop button is pressed at a predetermined timing (correct answer), 12 medals (predetermined number) are used. Is paid out. If the timing of pressing the stop button is other than the predetermined timing (incorrect answer), the medal is not paid out.

Further, in the above case, when the stop order is "right middle left" or "right middle left" (third stop order), "C_control bell 1-4" ("C_control bell 1" to "C_control bell 1" to "C_control bell 1"). The combination of symbols according to 4 ") is stopped and displayed. As a result, one (specific number) of medals, which is less than the predetermined number (12), is paid out. In addition, "C_control bell 1-4" shows a specific example of a specific role which concerns on this invention.

As described above, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "21", in the present embodiment, it depends on the first stop order in which a predetermined number (12 medals) of medals are paid out and the timing of pressing the stop button. Therefore, a second stop order in which a predetermined number of medals are not paid out and a third stop order in which only a specific number (1 piece) of medals less than a predetermined number (12 medals) are paid out are set. Among the stop orders (push orders) set in this way, it is preferable to recommend the second stop order.

Even if you try to stop multiple reels in the first stop order or the third stop order, which is not recommended, to improve the probability that the small winning combination for which a predetermined number (12 medals) will be paid out will be stopped and displayed, a specific number Only (1) medals may be paid out. That is, when a plurality of reels are stopped in an unrecommended stop order, only a specific number (1) of medals are paid out with a probability of 1/2. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is preferable to play the game in the second stop order in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out according to the pressing timing of the stop button. Then, when the player is allowed to play the game in the recommended second stop order, it is possible to suppress the increase in the payout of medals in the normal game, and improve the payout probability of the medal in the AT. be able to.

Further, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "26", that is, when the winning number "2" is won in the BB1 gaming state (see the internal lottery table for the RB1 gaming state in FIG. 20), the internal winning is achieved. As the combination, "C_C bell" and "C_BB medium control combination 1" to "C_BB medium control combination 6" are duplicated. In this case, when the stop order by pressing the stop button is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left", that is, when the right reel 3R is first stopped (hereinafter, this pressing order is used). The symbol combination related to "C_BB medium control combination 1" to "C_BB medium control combination 6" is stopped and displayed in "reverse push"), and 11 medals are paid out. In addition, "C_BB middle control combination 1" to "C_BB middle control combination 6" are roles that make it possible to obtain the maximum number of medals to be paid out in total during the game period of "BB1". On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed in any other pressing order, the symbol combination related to "C_C bell" is stopped and displayed, and 12 medals are paid out.

In the present embodiment, in the game of "BB1", when the game of "BB1" is completed without internally winning any of "C_BB medium control combination 1" to "C_BB medium control combination 6" (described later). If the condition of "when the bonus is completed" is met), the privilege of activating ART will be obtained. That is, in "BB1", one of "C_BB medium control combination 1" to "C_BB medium control combination 6" is won, and the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed ("reverse push navigation"). ) Is performed, the condition of "when the bonus is completed", which will be described later, is not satisfied, and the privilege of activating ART after the end of "BB1" is not given.

[Correspondence table of internal winning combination, stop order and RT transition]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop order, and the RT transition will be described. FIG. 55 is a correspondence table between the internal winning combination (small winning combination / replay data pointer), the stop order, and the RT transition, and corresponds to the combination of the internal winning combination (small winning combination / replay data pointer) and the stop order. Indicates the transition destination of the RT game state.

For example, when the data pointer for small combination / replay is "2", as described in FIG. 54, "normal rip" is performed on condition that the stop order is "left middle right" or "left / right middle". The combination of symbols related to is stopped and displayed. Therefore, in this case, the combination of symbols related to the "RT0 transition lip" is not stopped and displayed, and the transition of the RT gaming state to the RT0 gaming state is avoided (corresponding to "no transition" in FIG. 55). ..

Further, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "5", as described with reference to FIG. 54, a combination of symbols related to the "RT2 transition lip" is provided on the condition that the stop order is "middle left / right". Is stopped and displayed. Therefore, in this case, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state (corresponding to "RT2 transition" in FIG. 55).

Further, when the small combination / replay data pointer is "21", it is a condition that the stop order is "middle left / right" or "middle right / left" (first stop order) as described with reference to FIG. 54. The combination of symbols related to "C_C bell" is stopped and displayed. Therefore, in this case, there is no transition of the RT gaming state (corresponding to "no transition" in FIG. 55).

When the small combination / replay data pointer is "21" and the stop order is "left middle right" or "left / right middle" (second stop order), the stop button pressing timing is a predetermined timing (2nd stop order). If the answer is correct), the combination of symbols related to "C_B bell" is stopped and displayed, and if the stop button press timing is other than the predetermined timing (incorrect answer), "R_bell transition 2" or "R_bell transition" The combination of symbols related to "eye 2" is stopped and displayed. Therefore, when the stop button pressing timing is a predetermined timing (correct answer), there is no transition of the RT gaming state, and when the stop button pressing timing is other than the predetermined timing (incorrect answer), RT The gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state (corresponding to "no transition / RT1 transition" in FIG. 55).

If the small combination / replay data pointer is "21" and the stop order is "right / left middle" or "right middle left" (third stop order), "C_control bell 1" to "C_control". The combination of symbols related to "Bell 4" is stopped and displayed. Therefore, in this case, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state (corresponding to "RT0 transition" in FIG. 55).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "21", the second stop order ("left middle right" or "left and right inside") is recommended as the pressing order. However, ignoring the second stop order recommended by the player, the multiple reels were stopped in the first or third stop order (the player does not know which is the first stop order). In that case, the payout of at least one medal can be secured. However, as described above, when a plurality of reels are stopped in the third stop order, not only one medal is paid out, but also the gaming state shifts to a disadvantageous gaming state (RT0 gaming state). To do.

That is, if a plurality of reels are stopped in a first or third stop order that is not recommended, the situation may be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in a normal game other than the assist time (AT), the player can be made to stop the plurality of reels in the recommended second stop order.

[Billy Bonus]
Here, the contents of the "Billy Bonus"("BB3") will be described. For the "Billy Bonus", "C_Billy" is determined as the internal winning role, and the symbol combinations ("Billy BAR"-"Billy BAR"-"Billy BAR") corresponding to "C_Billy" are displayed along the valid line. It works when it is done.

In the present embodiment, it is notified that "Don"-"Don"-"Don", which is a combination of specific symbols, may be stopped and displayed while the "Billy Bonus" is operating (during the Billy Bonus). (Instructed to aim for the stop display of "Don"-"Don"-"Don"). As a result, the player can recognize that the combination of specific symbols ("Don"-"Don"-"Don") may be stopped and displayed during the billy bonus.

The gaming state in which the "billy bonus" is activated is the BB3 gaming state (see FIG. 12). During the operation period of "BB3", the operation of "RB3" is continuously performed, and during the BB3 gaming state, it is also in the RB3 gaming state. Therefore, during the billy bonus, the internal winning combination is determined with reference to the internal lottery table for the RB3 gaming state (see FIG. 22).

In the present embodiment, when the internal lottery table for the RB3 gaming state (see FIG. 22) is referred to, any one of the winning numbers "1" to "6" or "missing" is determined. Then, when any one of the winning numbers "1" to "6" is determined, any one of "33" to "38" is acquired as a small winning combination / replay data pointer.

In the internal lottery referring to the internal lottery table for the RB3 game state, for example, when the winning number "3" (abbreviated as "F_Billy S Donbell") is won, "35" is acquired as the data pointer for the small role / replay. Then, when "35" is acquired as the data pointer for the small role / replay, "C_Billy middle role 1", "C_Billy middle role 2", "C_Billy middle role 5" and "C_C" are used as the internal winning roles. "Bell" and the like are determined (see FIG. 30).

If the symbol combination ("Bell"-"Don"-"Bell") corresponding to "C_Billy Middle Role 1" is displayed along the valid line during the Billy Bonus, 15 medals will be paid out. (See Fig. 11), and the "Billy Bonus" ends. In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to "C_Billy middle role 1" is displayed along the effective line, if the stop button pressing timing is a predetermined timing, the specific symbol combination ("Don"-"Don"-" "Don"-"Don") is displayed along the crossdown line (invalid line). The cross-down line is a line connecting the upper region of the left reel 3L, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the lower region of the right reel 3R within the frame of the display window 4.

If the symbol combination ("Bell"-"Don"-"Rip 1") corresponding to "C_Billy Middle Role 2" is displayed along the valid line during the Billy Bonus, 15 medals will be paid. It is issued (see Fig. 11), and the "Billy Bonus" ends. In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to "C_Billy middle role 2" is displayed along the effective line, if the stop button pressing timing is a predetermined timing, the specific symbol combination ("Don"-"Don"-" "Don"-"Don") is displayed along the cross-up line (invalid line). The cross-up line is a line connecting the lower region of the left reel 3L, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the upper region of the right reel 3R within the frame of the display window 4.

Furthermore, if the symbol combination ("Bell"-"Bell"-"Rip 1") corresponding to "C_Billy Middle Role 5" is displayed along the valid line during the Billy Bonus, 15 medals will be awarded. Is paid out (see FIG. 11), and the "Billy Bonus" ends. Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to "C_Billy middle role 5" is displayed along the effective line, if the stop button pressing timing is a predetermined timing, the specific symbol combination ("Don"-"Don"-" "Don"-"Don") is displayed along the top line (invalid line). The top line is a line connecting the upper region of the left reel 3L, the upper region of the middle reel 3C, and the upper region of the right reel 3R within the frame of the display window 4.

As described above, the player is aware by notification that the combination of specific symbols (“Don”-“Don”-“Don”) may be stopped and displayed during the billy bonus. Then, when the player performs a stop operation such that the combination of specific symbols (“Don”-“Don”-“Don”) is stopped and displayed, the above-mentioned stop button pressing timing tends to be a predetermined timing. ..

“C_Billy middle role 1”, “C_Billy middle role 2” and “C_Billy middle role 5” in the present embodiment show a specific example of the first internal winning combination. That is, the first internal winning combination is a specified number (15 medals) that exceeds the specified number (14 medals) that triggers the end of the bonus game when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed along the valid line. Is an internal winning role to be paid out. Further, in the first internal winning combination, a combination of specific symbols ("Don"-"Don"-"Don") is displayed along a linear line (invalid line) other than the valid line in the frame of the display window. It is an internal winning role that can be made to.

On the other hand, if the symbol combination ("bell"-"bell"-"bell") corresponding to "C_C bell" is displayed along the valid line during the billy bonus, 15 medals will be paid out. (See Fig. 8), the "Billy Bonus" ends. When the symbol combination corresponding to "C_C bell" is displayed along the effective line, "Don"-"Don"-"Don" can be used regardless of the timing of pressing the stop button. The symbol combination is not displayed along the invalid line.

The “C_C bell” and the like in the present embodiment show a specific example of the second internal winning combination. That is, the second internal winning combination is a designated number (15 cards) that exceeds the specified number (14 cards) that triggers the end of the bonus game when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed along the valid line. It is an internal winning role where medals are paid out. Further, in the second internal winning combination, the combination of specific symbols ("Don"-"Don"-"Don") is displayed along a straight line (invalid line) other than the valid line in the frame of the display window. It is an internal winning role that is not done.

In the present embodiment, when "33" to "37" are acquired as the small winning combination / replay data pointers, the first internal winning combination and the second internal winning combination are duplicated (see FIG. 30). .. Then, when "33" or "34" is acquired as the data pointer for the small winning combination / replay, the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the second internal winning combination is the symbol corresponding to the first internal winning combination. Priority is given to the display of the combination, and the symbol combination corresponding to the second internal winning combination is displayed. Therefore, in this case, in the current unit game, the "billy bonus" ends without displaying the combination of the specific symbols in the frame of the display window.

On the other hand, when "35" to "37" are acquired as the data pointers for small winning combination / replay, the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the first internal winning combination is the symbol corresponding to the second internal winning combination. Priority is given to the display of the combination, and the symbol combination corresponding to the first internal winning combination can be displayed. Therefore, in this case, in the current unit game, if the stop button is pressed at a predetermined timing, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed in the frame of the display window, and the "billy bonus" ends.

In the present embodiment, when "35" to "37" are acquired as data pointers for small winning combination / replay during the billy bonus, that is, when the combination of specific symbols can be displayed along the invalid line. , The lottery value of the ART lottery table (see FIGS. 136 and 137 described later) in the bonus described later is set so as to be sure to win any "ART" in the ART lottery. That is, if a combination of specific symbols can be displayed along the invalid line during the billy bonus, a privilege advantageous to the player is given.

By the way, in the internal lottery referring to the internal lottery table for the RB3 game state, when the winning number "6" (abbreviated as "F_Billy Chance Bell") is won, "38" is acquired as the data pointer for the small role / replay. Then, when "38" is acquired as the data pointer for the small winning combination / replay, "C_Billy middle role 3", "C_Billy middle role 4", "C_control bell 1", etc. are determined as the internal winning combination. (See FIG. 30).

If the symbol combination ("Bell"-"Don"-"Yamabuki") corresponding to "C_Billy Middle Role 3" is displayed along the valid line during the Billy Bonus, one medal will be paid out. (See FIG. 11). In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to "C_Billy middle role 3" is displayed along the effective line, the combination of specific symbols ("Don"-"is displayed regardless of the timing of pressing the stop button. "Don"-"Don") is never displayed along the invalid line.

If the symbol combination ("Bell"-"Don"-"Snow Mountain") corresponding to "C_Billy Middle Role 4" is displayed along the valid line during the Billy Bonus, one medal will be paid out. (See FIG. 11). In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to "C_Billy middle role 4" is displayed along the effective line, the combination of specific symbols ("Don"-"Don"-"No matter which timing the stop button is pressed is "Don"-"Don") is never displayed along the invalid line.

Furthermore, if the symbol combination ("Bell"-"Rip 1"-"Yamabuki") corresponding to "C_Control Bell 1" is displayed along the valid line during the Billy Bonus, one medal will be awarded. It will be paid out (see Fig. 9). Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to "C_control bell 1" is displayed along the effective line, the specific symbol combination ("Don"-"Don"-"No matter which timing the stop button is pressed. "Don"-"Don") is never displayed along the invalid line.

“C_Billy middle role 3”, “C_Billy middle role 4”, “C_control bell 1” and the like in the present embodiment show a specific example of the third internal winning combination. That is, in the third internal winning combination, when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed along the valid line, the number of medals (1) is less than or equal to the specified number (14) that triggers the end of the bonus game. Is an internal winning role to be paid out. Further, the third internal winning combination is an internal winning combination in which a combination of specific symbols is not displayed along a linear line (invalid line) other than the effective line in the frame of the display window.

Further, in the internal lottery referring to the internal lottery table for the RB3 gaming state, for example, when "loss" is determined, in the present embodiment, priority is given to displaying the "don" symbol along the effective line. Controls the reel stop. The reel stop control according to the present invention is a stop control based on a table that defines the number of sliding pieces (so-called table control) and a stop control that preferentially displays a stop display of a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination (so-called table control). It includes so-called control control) and stop control that combines these two.

As shown in FIG. 7, during the billy bonus in which the number of medals to be inserted is set to one, the internal winning combination corresponding to the combination of specific symbols (“Don”-“Don”-“Don”) is specified. Not. Therefore, even if the combination of specific symbols ("Don"-"Don"-"Don") is displayed along the valid line during the billy bonus, the operation of "C_Don BB" ("BB1") is not started.

In the present embodiment, when "missing" is determined during the billy bonus, that is, when a combination of specific symbols is displayed along the valid line, some "ART" is always won in the ART lottery. , The lottery value of the ART lottery table (see FIGS. 136 and 137 described later) in the bonus described later is set. That is, when a combination of specific symbols is displayed along the valid line during the billy bonus, a privilege advantageous to the player is given.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first internal winning combination or the second internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the billy bonus, the "billy bonus" is given in the unit game (one game). finish. Then, when "33" or "34" is acquired as the data pointer for the small role / replay in the unit game (one game), it is not possible to obtain an advantageous privilege for the player. Therefore, the player will play the game during the billy bonus with a sense of tension, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Also, if the third internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the billy bonus, the combination of specific symbols ("Don"-"Don"-"Don") will not be displayed along the invalid line. , The bonus game will continue unless the specified number (14 medals) that triggers the end of the bonus game has been paid out by then. As a result, since the combination of specific symbols can be displayed in the subsequent games, the player's expectation of obtaining advantageous benefits can be maintained, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, if the result of the internal lottery during the billy bonus is "missing", the combination of specific symbols is displayed along the valid line and the medal is not paid out. Therefore, it is possible to obtain advantageous benefits for the player, continue the bonus game, and enhance the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol of the left reel 3L constituting the symbol combination corresponding to "C_Billy middle role 1" to "C_Billy middle role 4" is "bell", and the symbol of the middle reel 3C is "Don". That is, the symbols of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the first internal winning combination "C_Billy middle combination 1" and "C_Billy middle combination 2" are the third internal winning combination. It is the same as that of "C_Billy middle role 3" and "C_Billy middle role 4".

Therefore, when the third internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the third stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R, the first internal winning combination is displayed until the symbol of the right reel 3R is stopped. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the symbol combination corresponding to the role will be displayed. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a combination capable of displaying a combination of specific symbols (“Don”-“Don”-“Don”) along the invalid line is determined (as a small combination / replay data pointer). When "35" to "37" are acquired), a privilege (winning of ART) that is advantageous to the player is given. That is, if the combination of the specific symbols ("Don"-"Don"-"Don") can be displayed along the invalid line is determined, the combination of the specific symbols ("Don"-"Don"-" Even if "Don") is not displayed along the invalid line, a privilege (winning of ART) that is advantageous to the player is given. However, in the present embodiment, when a combination of specific symbols ("Don"-"Don"-"Don") is displayed along the invalid line, a privilege (winning of ART) that is advantageous to the player is given. It may be configured.

<Explanation of sub-game state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, various sub-game states provided in the present embodiment, transition conditions between the sub-game states, and the like will be described. In the present embodiment, various gaming states related to the effect controlled by the sub control circuit 42 (sub CPU 81) are referred to as "sub gaming states".

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the sub-game states are "general state", "chance zone (CZ)", "D_ART", "B_ART", "G_ART (G zone)", and "R_ART (rocket)". Sub-game states called "zone)" and "viking rush (VR)" are set.

The "general state" and the "chance zone" are sub-game states in which ART does not operate. On the other hand, "D_ART", "B_ART", "G_ART", "R_ART" and "Viking Rush" are sub-game states (specific game states) in which ART is activated.

In the present embodiment, as described above, five types of states are provided as the sub-game states in which the ART operates, and there are three types of ART in which the ART operates in these sub-game states. The first ART (first assist state) is an ART that operates in "D_ART", the second ART (second assist state) is an ART that operates in "B_ART", and a third ART (third). 3 assist state) is an ART that operates in "G_ART (G zone)". The ART that operates with "R_ART" is basically the same type of ART as that of "G_ART", and the difference between the two is the termination condition of ART. Further, the "Viking Rush" (predetermined specific game state) is a sub-game state executed during "D_ART", "B_ART", "G_ART", or "R_ART", and operates in "Viking Rush". The ART to be played is the same type of ART as that of the sub-game state in which it is executed.

[General state]
The "general state" is a sub-game state executed during the RT0 game state and the RT1 game state. In the "general state", basically, whether or not the ART wins or not is won by referring to the ART lottery table for the "general state" shown in FIGS. 71, 74, etc. described later for each game (unit game). A lottery (ART lottery) is performed.

If the ART wins in the ART lottery in the "general state", at least one of "D_ART" and "B_ART" wins. Then, when the ART is won by the ART lottery, a lottery is performed to determine the number of precursor games (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of ART precursor games") until the game shifts to the winning ART. That is, when the ART is won during the "general state", the sub-game state shifts from the "general state" to "D_ART" or "B_ART" after the games of the number of ART precursor games are digested.

Further, in the "general state", a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the sub-game state shifts to the "chance zone (CZ)" by referring to the chance zone transition lottery table (not shown) for each game. Then, when the lottery is won and the transition to the "chance zone (CZ)" is decided, the number of precursor games until the sub-game state shifts to the "chance zone" (hereinafter referred to as "the number of precursor games of CZ"). ), The number of games staying in the chance zone (hereinafter referred to as "the number of CZ games"), etc. are drawn by lottery.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, at the same time as the lottery process of whether or not the sub-game state shifts to the "chance zone (CZ)", the number of CZ precursor games until the shift to the "chance zone" and the chance zone The number of CZ games and the like may be drawn using a chance zone transition lottery table (not shown). That is, whether or not to shift to the "chance zone" and the number of CZ precursor games and the number of CZ games when shifting to the "chance zone" may be determined by one lottery process.

[Chance zone]
The "chance zone" is a sub-game state executed during the RT0 game state and the RT1 game state. When the transition to the "chance zone" is determined in the "general state" and the number of CZ precursor games is exhausted, the sub-game state shifts from the "general state" to the "chance zone". Then, after the transition to the "chance zone", when the number of CZ games (number of staying games) is exhausted, the "chance zone" ends.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of CZ games is not determined, and the predetermined conditions such as, for example, when a predetermined internal winning combination is determined or when a predetermined display combination is stopped and displayed are used as an opportunity. , The configuration may be such that the end of the "chance zone" is determined.

In the "chance zone", basically, the ART lottery is performed for each game (unit game) with reference to the ART lottery table for the "chance zone" shown in FIGS. 72 and 75 described later. The probability of winning an ART in an ART lottery in a "chance zone" is higher than that in an ART lottery in a "general state". When an ART wins in the ART lottery in the "chance zone", at least one of "D_ART" and "B_ART" wins as in the "general state". That is, when the ART wins in the "chance zone", the sub-game state shifts from the "chance zone" to "D_ART" or "B_ART" after the games of the number of ART precursor games are exhausted.

[D_ART]
"D_ART" is a sub-game state executed during the RT2 game state. For example, "D_ART" is started after "D_ART" is won by the ART lottery during the "general state" or the "chance zone" and the games of the ART precursor games number determined by the lottery are digested. .. Further, in the present embodiment, the "D_ART" is a sub-storage area (the winning information of the "D_ART") which will be described later when the information indicating that the "D_ART" is won when the "D_ART" or the "B_ART" is completed It is also started when it is stored in the ART stock area).

When the sub-game state shifts to "D_ART", the number of staying games of "D_ART" (hereinafter referred to as "ART start G (game) number") is drawn with reference to the ART game number lottery table (not shown). .. Next, the "ART start G number" determined by the lottery is set in the ART game number counter. The value of the ART game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each execution of the unit game in "D_ART". Then, when the value of the ART game number counter becomes "0", "D_ART" ends.

Further, in "D_ART", the continuous stock lottery table (not shown) is referred to for each game, and a lottery (continuous stock lottery) is performed to determine whether or not the continuous stock is won, and each time the continuous stock is won, the continuous stock is drawn. "1" is added to the counter.

If you win the continuous stock during "D_ART", after the game of "ART start G number" is exhausted in "D_ART", a new "ART start G number" is set in the ART game number counter and "D_ART" continues. (Loop). Specifically, when the game of "ART start G number" is digested, if the value of the continuous stock counter is "1" or more, the value of the continuous stock counter is subtracted by "1", and at the time of continuation. The "ART start G number" is newly determined with reference to the ART game number lottery table (not shown). Then, the newly determined "ART start G number" is set in the ART game number counter, and "D_ART" is continued.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the game of "D_ART" is repeated until the value of the continuous stock counter becomes "0". In the present embodiment, as the number of winnings of continuous stock increases in "D_ART", the value of the continuous stock counter increases, the number of continuous "D_ART" increases, and the game of "D_ART" which is advantageous for the player is performed. You can continue for a long time.

Further, in "D_ART", basically, ART lottery is performed for each game by referring to the ART lottery table for "D_ART" shown in FIGS. 110 to 121 described later. Then, when a predetermined ART is won by the ART lottery in "D_ART", the information of the winning predetermined ART is stored in the sub storage area (ART stock area) described later.

[B_ART]
"B_ART" is a sub-game state executed during the RT2 game state. For example, "B_ART" is started after "B_ART" is won by the ART lottery during the "general state" or the "chance zone" and the games of the ART precursor games number determined by the lottery are digested. .. Further, in the present embodiment, when "D_ART" or "B_ART" is completed, "B_ART" is also displayed in the sub storage area (ART stock area) described later for the winning information of "B_ART". To be started.

When the sub-game state shifts to "B_ART", the "ART start G number" of "B_ART" is drawn with reference to the ART game number lottery table (not shown). Next, the "ART start G number" determined by the lottery is set in the ART game number counter. The value of the ART game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each execution of the unit game in "B_ART". Then, when the value of the ART game number counter becomes "0", "B_ART" ends.

Further, in "B_ART", the number of additional games is drawn by referring to the number of additional games lottery table (not shown) for each game (the number of additional games is drawn), and the determined number of additional games is added to the ART game number counter. To do. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the number of determinations of the number of additional games in "B_ART" increases, the number of ART games increases, and the game of "B_ART", which is advantageous for the player, can be continued for a long time.

Further, in "B_ART", basically, ART lottery is performed for each game by referring to the ART lottery table for "B_ART" shown in FIGS. 98 to 109 described later. Then, when a predetermined ART is won by the ART lottery in "B_ART", the information of the winning predetermined ART is stored in the sub storage area (ART stock area) described later.

[G_ART]
"G_ART" is a sub-game state executed during the RT2 game state. "G_ART" is started when the winning information of "G_ART" is stored in the sub storage area (ART stock area) during "D_ART" or "B_ART". That is, when the winning information of "G_ART" is stored in the sub storage area, the game of "D_ART" or "B_ART" is interrupted and "G_ART" is started. The "G_ART" according to the present embodiment is started after digesting the games of the number of precursor games determined by lottery (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of coalesced precursor games").

Further, when "G_ART" is started, the number of combined games (number of staying games) is determined with reference to the combined game number lottery table (not shown). Next, the determined number of combined games is set in the combined game number counter. Then, when the value of the combined game number counter becomes "0", "G_ART" ends.

In "G_ART", basically, ART lottery is performed for each game by referring to the ART lottery table for "G_ART" shown in FIGS. 123 to 128 described later. Further, when a predetermined ART is won by the ART lottery in "G_ART", the information of the winning predetermined ART is stored in the sub storage area (ART stock area) described later. In this embodiment, the probability that each ART will be won by the ART lottery in "G_ART" is higher than that in "D_ART" or "B_ART".

Further, during "G_ART", the value of the ART game number counter set in "D_ART" or "B_ART", which is the sub-game state before the transition to "G_ART", is not subtracted. Then, when "G_ART" is completed, the sub-game state before the transition to "G_ART", that is, "D_ART" or "B_ART" is restored.

[R_ART]
"R_ART" is a sub-game state executed during the RT2 game state. "R_ART" interrupts the game of "D_ART" or "B_ART" when the winning information of "R_ART" is stored in the sub storage area (ART stock area) during "D_ART" or "B_ART". And start. In this case, "R_ART" is started after digesting the games of the number of precursor games determined by lottery (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of rocket precursor games").

Further, in the present embodiment, when the winning information of "R_ART" is stored in the sub storage area (ART stock area) during "G_ART", "R_ART" is started even after the "G_ART" is completed. .. When the winning information of "R_ART" is stored in the sub storage area during "G_ART", the rocket precursor game played over one or more games is not performed after "G_ART" is completed. That is, in this case, when "G_ART" ends, the sub-game state directly shifts from "G_ART" to "R_ART".

In the present embodiment, the winning information of "R_ART" is stored in the sub storage area during "G_ART", and even when "G_ART" ends, after digesting the game of the number of rocket precursor games, "R_ART" May be started. In this case, first, when "G_ART" is completed, the sub-game state before the transition to "G_ART", that is, "D_ART" or "B_ART" is restored. Then, after the game of the number of rocket precursor games is exhausted in "D_ART" or "B_ART" after the return, "R_ART" is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the internal winning combination related to "C_Don BB", "C_Red 7" or "C_BAR" is won, "R_ART" ends. That is, "R_ART" ends when the internal winning combination related to the bonus game ("BB1" or "BB2") is determined. In the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols related to "C_Don BB", "C_Red 7" or "C_BAR" is stopped and displayed (bonus game ("BB1" or "BB2")), the display combination is When it is decided), "R_ART" may be terminated.

In the present embodiment, even if the internal winning combination (“C_Billy”) related to the operation of “BB3” is determined, “R_ART” does not end. If the internal winning combination ("C_Billy") related to the operation of "BB3" is determined during "R_ART", the information that the internal winning combination "C_Billy" has won is notified, and the internal winning combination "C_Billy" is notified. An effect is performed to encourage the stop display of the combination of symbols corresponding to "C_Billy" ("Billy BAR"-"Billy BAR"-"Billy BAR").

Then, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination "C_Billy" is stopped and displayed, "BB3" is activated. In this case, first, "R_ART" is interrupted, and the sub-game state shifts to the "general state" (or "chance zone"). After that, when the operation of "BB3" is completed, the sub-game state before the transition to the "general state" (or "chance zone"), that is, "R_ART" is restored.

In "R_ART", basically, ART lottery is performed for each game with reference to the ART lottery table for "R_ART" shown in FIGS. 129 and 130 described later. Further, when a predetermined ART is won by the ART lottery in "R_ART", the information of the winning predetermined ART is stored in the sub storage area (ART stock area) described later. In this embodiment, the probability that each ART will be won by the ART lottery in "R_ART" is higher than that in "D_ART" or "B_ART".

[Viking Rush]
The "Viking Rush (VR)" shows a specific example of a predetermined specific gaming state in which an alternative effect according to the present invention is performed.

The "Viking Rush" is a sub-game state related to the production in which the number of ART games is expected to be added (added), and is executed during "D_ART", "B_ART", "G_ART", or "R_ART". To. The lottery for whether or not to execute this "Viking Rush" is performed for each game in "D_ART", "B_ART", "G_ART", and "R_ART", respectively. In addition, "Viking Rush" is started when a lottery for whether or not to execute it is won and then the alternative question (the alternative effect at the time of VR lock described later) is answered correctly.

In "Viking Rush", alternative effects are performed over at least five games. Specifically, an effect (touch challenge) is performed in which the player is allowed to select and touch one of the left character decoration unit 22L and the right character decoration unit 22R (see FIG. 2) of the pachislot machine 1. As described above, the left character decoration unit 22L and the right character decoration unit 22R are provided with a left touch sensor 23L and a right touch sensor 23R, respectively. Therefore, when the player's hand is touched by one of the character decoration units, the touch sensor of the touched character decoration unit transmits an input signal to the sub-control circuit 42.

In the "Viking Rush", for example, one of the left character decoration unit 22L and the right character decoration unit 22R is set to the correct answer and the other is set to the incorrect answer for each game. Then, it is determined whether or not the character decoration portion selected by the player is the correct answer. In the present embodiment, the number of ART games to be added (hereinafter referred to as "the number of VR additional games") is increased according to the number of correct answers in the alternative production ("Viking Rush") executed over five games. It is determined. This "number of VR additional games" shows a specific example of the number of additional games according to the present invention.

In the present embodiment, when the number of correct answers is "n", the initial value of the number of VR additional games is "d", and the coefficient is "f", the number of VR additional games "m" is calculated by the following formula. To.
m = d × f ^n-1

Therefore, the number of VR additional games determined in "Viking Rush" is multiplied by "f" each time the answer is correct. In the present embodiment, the initial value "d" is set to "20" and the coefficient "f" is set to "2". As a result, the number of VR additional games "m" is calculated by the following formula.
m = 20 × 2 ^n-1

That is, when the number of correct answers is 1 in the 5 alternative productions (touch challenge), the number of VR additional games "m" is "20", and when the number of correct answers is 2 times. , The number of VR additional games "m" is "40". If the number of correct answers is three, the number of VR additional games "m" is "80", and if the number of correct answers is four, the number of VR additional games "m" is "160". It becomes. Then, when the number of correct answers is 5 times (all correct answers are given to the 5 alternative productions), the number of VR additional games "m" is "320".

In the present embodiment, if there is one or more incorrect answers in the five alternative effects, the "Viking Rush" ends with the end of the fifth alternative effect. On the other hand, if all the five alternative productions are answered correctly, then the alternative production ("Viking Rush") is extended until the answer is incorrect. In the present embodiment, the sixth and subsequent alternative productions are referred to as "Viking Rush (VR) Extra".

In the present embodiment, in the "Viking Rush Extra", "320" is added to the number of VR addition games determined up to the fifth time each time the answer is correct. For example, in "Viking Rush Extra", the first alternative production (sixth alternative production after the start of "Viking Rush") is the correct answer, and the second alternative production ( If the 7th alternative production after the start of "Viking Rush" is incorrect, the number of VR additional games "m" becomes "640". In addition, if the answer is correct up to the second alternative production of "Viking Rush Extra" and the third alternative production is incorrect, the number of VR additional games "m" becomes "960". ..

Further, in the present embodiment, when the addition of the number of games (the number of VR addition games) is determined in the "Viking Rush" in "D_ART" or "B_ART", in the "D_ART" or "B_ART". The determined number of VR added games is added to the ART game number counter. On the other hand, when the addition of the number of games (the number of VR addition games) is determined in the "Viking Rush" in "G_ART" or "R_ART", the sub-game before the transition to "G_ART" or "R_ART" The number of VR added games is added to the ART game number counter in the state, that is, "D_ART" or "B_ART".

As described above, in the "Viking Rush (VR)", the "number of VR additional games" is determined based on the selection result of the player, so that the "number of VR additional games" in the "AT (ART)" is determined, that is, " It can attract the player's interest in the game of "Viking Rush (VR)". As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game related to "AT (ART)".

<Structure of data table stored in sub ROM>
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the sub ROM 82 will be described.

[Special flag lottery table]
First, the configuration of the special flag lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 57. The special flag lottery table defines a data pointer (bonus data pointer and small winning combination / replay data pointer) and a modified small winning combination / replay data pointer that is changed according to the game lock flag.

For example, if the bonus data pointer is "1", the small win / replay data pointer is "16", and the game lock flag is "0", the changed small win / replay is used. "40" is determined as the data pointer. If the game lock flag is neither "1" to "9", it becomes "0".

Further, for example, when the bonus data pointer is "1" and the game lock flag is any of "1" to "4", after the change, regardless of the value of the small role / replay data pointer. "42" is determined as the data pointer for the small role / replay.

[Lottery flag lottery table]
Next, the configuration of various lottery flags lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 70. In addition, each lottery flag lottery table defines the value of the lottery flag set corresponding to the bonus data pointer, the small winning combination / replay data pointer, and the game lock flag.

In this embodiment, the lottery flags A-1, A-2, A-3, the lottery flags B-1, B-2, B-3, the lottery flag D, and the lottery flags are referred to with reference to various lottery flag tables. 14 types of lottery flags are determined: G, lottery flag H, lottery flags I-1, I-2, lottery flag J, and lottery flag K. These lottery flags are used in the effect determination process described later (see FIG. 253 described later) and the like.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery flag A-1 lottery table. Lottery flag A-1 The lottery table defines the value of the lottery flag A-1 set corresponding to the data pointer and the game lock flag. For example, in the lottery flag A-1 lottery table, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "0" or "18", the lottery flag is irrespective of the value of the bonus data pointer and the value of the game lock flag. As A-1, "0" is determined.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery flag A-2 lottery table. Lottery flag A-2 The lottery table defines the value of the lottery flag A-2 set corresponding to the data pointer and the game lock flag. For example, in the lottery flag A-2 lottery table, when the bonus data pointer is "0" and the small win / replay data pointer is "42" or "43", it is related to the value of the game lock flag. Instead, "0" is determined as the lottery flag A-2.

Further, FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery flag A-3 lottery table. Lottery flag A-3 The lottery table defines the value of the lottery flag A-3 set corresponding to the data pointer and the game lock flag. For example, in the lottery flag A-3 lottery table, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "0" or "18", the lottery flag is irrespective of the value of the bonus data pointer and the value of the game lock flag. As A-3, "0" is determined.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery flag B-1 lottery table. Lottery flag B-1 The lottery table defines the value of the lottery flag B-1 set corresponding to the data pointer and the game lock flag. For example, in the lottery flag B-1 lottery table, when the small win / replay data pointer is "0", the lottery flag B-1 is set regardless of the value of the bonus data pointer and the value of the game lock flag. , "1" is determined.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery flag B-2 lottery table. Lottery flag B-2 The lottery table defines the value of the lottery flag B-2 set corresponding to the data pointer and the game lock flag. For example, in the lottery flag B-2 lottery table, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "25", the lottery flag B-2 is set regardless of the value of the bonus data pointer and the value of the game lock flag. , "0" is determined.

Further, FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery flag B-3 lottery table. Lottery flag B-3 The lottery table defines the value of the lottery flag B-3 set corresponding to the data pointer and the game lock flag. For example, in the lottery flag B-3 lottery table, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "0" or "18", the lottery flag is irrespective of the value of the bonus data pointer and the value of the game lock flag. As B-3, "0" is determined.

FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery flag D lottery table. Lottery flag D The lottery table defines the value of the lottery flag D set corresponding to the data pointer and the game lock flag. For example, in the lottery flag D lottery table, when the small win / replay data pointer is "9", the lottery flag D is "1" regardless of the value of the bonus data pointer and the value of the game lock flag. Is determined.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery flag G lottery table. Lottery flag G The lottery table defines the value of the lottery flag G set corresponding to the data pointer and the game lock flag. For example, in the lottery flag G lottery table, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "0" or "18", the lottery flag G is set regardless of the value of the bonus data pointer and the value of the game lock flag. , "0" is determined.

FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery flag H lottery table. Lottery flag H The lottery table defines the value of the lottery flag H set corresponding to the data pointer and the game lock flag. For example, in the lottery flag H lottery table, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "0" or "18", the lottery flag H is set regardless of the value of the bonus data pointer and the value of the game lock flag. , "0" is determined.

Further, for example, in the lottery flag H lottery table, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "1", the lottery flag H is set to "1" regardless of the value of the bonus data pointer and the value of the game lock flag. 2 ”is decided. However, in the present embodiment, even when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "1", the jackpot signal "3" described later is transmitted to the hall computer / calling device via the external terminal plate 18S. When the navigation generation condition is satisfied, the lottery flag H is changed from "2" to "3".

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery flag I-1 lottery table. Lottery flag I-1 The lottery table defines the value of the lottery flag I-1 set corresponding to the data pointer and the game lock flag. For example, in the lottery flag I-1 lottery table, when the small win / replay data pointer is "0" or "18", the lottery flag is irrespective of the value of the bonus data pointer and the value of the game lock flag. As I-1, "0" is determined.

FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery flag I-2 lottery table. Lottery flag I-2 The lottery table defines the value of the lottery flag I-2 set corresponding to the data pointer and the game lock flag. For example, in the lottery flag I-2 lottery table, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "0" or "18", the lottery flag is irrespective of the value of the bonus data pointer and the value of the game lock flag. As I-2, "0" is determined.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery flag J lottery table. Lottery flag J The lottery table defines the value of the lottery flag J set corresponding to the data pointer and the game lock flag. For example, in the lottery flag J lottery table, when the small win / replay data pointer is "41", the lottery flag J is "1" regardless of the value of the bonus data pointer and the value of the game lock flag. Is determined.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery flag K lottery table. Lottery flag K The lottery table defines the value of the lottery flag K set corresponding to the data pointer and the game lock flag. For example, in the lottery flag K lottery table, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "10" or "12", the lottery flag K is set regardless of the value of the bonus data pointer and the value of the game lock flag. , "1" is determined.

[ART lottery table]
Next, various ART lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 88. Each ART lottery table is referred to when performing an ART lottery in a non-ART and non-bonus game. Each ART lottery table shows the correspondence between the lottery result values (“0” to “7”) corresponding to the winning contents of ART and the lottery values set according to the value of the lottery flag A-1.

In the ART lottery using the ART lottery table, first, the random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is used as the value of the lottery result of the ART lottery table. The lottery value specified for each is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), the value of the lottery result at that time is won. The ART lottery with reference to various ART lottery tables is performed in the ART lottery process described later (see FIG. 249 described later).

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a configuration of an ART lottery table (No. 1). The ART lottery table (No. 1) is referred to when the sub-game state is "general state", the setting is "setting 1", and the game state is "between non-flags".

Here, the game states of "between flags" and "between non-flags" will be described. In the present embodiment, when any of "C_Don BB", "C_Red 7", "C_BAR" and "C_Billy" is determined as the internal winning combination, the internal winning combination is carried over as the carry-over role. Stored in the role storage area. Specifically, when the internal winning combination pertaining to any one of "C_Don BB", "C_Red 7", "C_BAR" and "C_Billy" is determined, bits 0 to 3 of the carry-over combination storage area 1 are determined. Of these, "1" is stored in the area of the corresponding bit.

"Between flags" is a period in which "1" is stored in any of bits 0 to 3 of the carry-over combination storage area 1, and "C_don BB" and "C_red 7" are used as internal winning combinations. , "C_BAR" and "C_Billy" are the periods during which the role is carried over. And, "between non-flags" is a period in which "0" is stored in all of bits 0 to 3 of the carry-over combination storage area 1, and "C_don BB" and "C_red 7" are used as internal winning combinations. , "C_BAR" and "C_Billy" are not carried over.

In the present embodiment, the games (unit games) in which the roles related to "C_Don BB", "C_Red 7", "C_BAR" and "C_Billy" are determined as the internal winning roles are "between flags" and It is not included in "between non-flags" but is called "flag establishment".

Further, "0" is assigned as the value of the first lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 1) shown in FIG. 71. The first lottery table type is used when determining the table number by referring to the table number determination table (see FIG. 91 described later) at the time of general and stock in CZ described later.

As shown in FIG. 71, when the ART lottery is performed with reference to the ART lottery table (No. 1), there is a high probability that the value of the lottery result will be “0 (missing)”. For example, in the ART lottery table (No. 1), even if the lottery flag A-1 is "7 (strong ice)" or "9 (strong cherry)", the value of the lottery result is always "0 (missing)". become.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ART lottery table (No. 2). The ART lottery table (No. 2) is referred to when the sub-game state is "in CZ (chance zone)", the setting is "setting 1", and the game state is "between non-flags". .. Further, "1" is assigned as the value of the first lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 2).

As is clear from the comparison between FIGS. 72 and 71, when the ART lottery is performed with reference to the ART lottery table (No. 2), the case where the ART lottery is performed with reference to the ART lottery table (No. 1) is performed. However, there is a high probability that "1 (B_ART win)" or "2 (D_ART win)" will be determined as the value of the lottery result. That is, the winning probability of ART in the "chance zone" is higher than that in the "general state".

Further, in the ART lottery table (No. 2), as shown in FIG. 72, for example, when the lottery flag A-1 is "6 (weak ice)" or "7 (strong ice)", the lottery result is obtained. As a value, "2 (D_ART win)" is determined, but "1 (B_ART win)" is not determined. At this time, when the lottery flag A-1 is "6 (weak ice)", "2 (D_ART win)" is determined as the value of the lottery result with a probability of about 1/3. Further, when the lottery flag A-1 is "7 (strong ice)", "2 (D_ART win)" is determined as the value of the lottery result with a probability of about 2/3.

Further, in the ART lottery table (No. 2), as shown in FIG. 72, for example, when the lottery flag A-1 is "8 (weak cherry)" or "9 (strong cherry)", the lottery result is obtained. As a value, "1 (B_ART win)" is determined, but "2 (D_ART win)" is not determined. At this time, when the lottery flag A-1 is "8 (weak cherry)", "1 (B_ART win)" is determined as the value of the lottery result with a probability of about 1/4. Further, when the lottery flag A-1 is "9 (strong cherry)", "1 (B_ART win)" is determined as the value of the lottery result with a probability of 1/2.

In the ART lottery table (No. 2) of the present embodiment, the internal winnings related to "weak ice" (small role / replay data pointer "10") and "strong ice" (small role / replay data pointer "11"). The combination shows a specific example of the "first special role" according to the present invention. Further, the internal winning combination related to "weak cherry" (small role / replay data pointer "12") and "strong cherry" (small role / replay data pointer "13", "14") is the "first winning combination" according to the present invention. This is a specific example of "2 special roles". Further, "D_ART" indicates a specific example of the "first assist state" according to the present invention, and "B_ART" indicates a specific example of the "second assist state" according to the present invention. is there.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the "first special role" is determined as the internal winning combination during the "non-ART", the probability that the first assisting state will be won rather than the second assisting state in the ART lottery of the game. Is high. On the other hand, when the "second special role" is determined as the internal winning combination during the "non-ART", the probability that the second assisting state is won is higher than the first assisting state in the ART lottery of the game.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ART lottery table (No. 3). The ART lottery table (No. 3) is referred to when the game state is "with base ART information", the setting is "setting 1", and the game state is "between non-flags". Further, "2" is assigned as the value of the first lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 3).

Here, "base ART information" will be described. The "base ART information" is information stored in a sub storage area (see FIG. 218 described later) described later when there is an ART to be started or returned next. In the present embodiment, the winning ART is started after winning one or a plurality of precursor games after winning various ARTs. Therefore, during one or more precursor games performed in the "general state" and the "chance zone", it is determined that the state is "with base ART information". Specifically, the gaming state in which the winning information of "D_ART" or "B_ART" is stored in the "ART stock area A" or "ART stock area B" of the sub storage area (see FIG. 218 described later) described later is , "There is base ART information".

When the ART lottery is performed with reference to the ART lottery table (No. 3), "7 (G_ART win)" may be determined as the value of the lottery result as shown in FIG. 73. For example, when the lottery flag A-1 is "7 (strong ice)" or "9 (strong cherry)", "7 (G_ART win)" is determined as the value of the lottery result with a probability of about 1/3. Will be done.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ART lottery table (No. 4). The ART lottery table (No. 4) is referred to when the sub-game state is "general state", the setting is "setting 1", and the game state is "flag established". Further, "3" is assigned as the value of the first lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 4).

When the ART lottery is performed with reference to the ART lottery table (No. 4), as shown in FIG. 74, there is a high probability that the value of the lottery result will be “0 (missing)”.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ART lottery table (No. 5). The ART lottery table (No. 5) is referred to when the sub-game state is "in CZ (chance zone)", the setting is "setting 1", and the game state is "flag established". Further, "4" is assigned as the value of the first lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 5).

As is clear from the comparison between FIGS. 75 and 74, when the ART lottery is performed with reference to the ART lottery table (No. 5), the case where the ART lottery is performed with reference to the ART lottery table (No. 4) is performed. However, there is a high probability that "1 (B_ART win)" or "2 (D_ART win)" will be determined as the value of the lottery result.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ART lottery table (No. 6). The ART lottery table (No. 6) is referred to when the game state is "with base ART information", the setting is "setting 1", and the game state is "flag established". Further, "5" is assigned as the value of the first lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 6).

When the ART lottery is performed with reference to the ART lottery table (No. 6), "7 (G_ART win)" may be determined as the value of the lottery result as shown in FIG. 76.

In the present embodiment, the ART lottery is not performed between the flags. Therefore, in "between the flags", the internal winning combination related to the re-game is more likely to be determined than in the normal state (RT0 game state or RT1 game state) without intentionally stopping and displaying the combination of symbols related to the bonus operation. Even if the RT3 game state is continued, the ART will not be won.

However, in a game in which the roles related to "C_Don BB", "C_Red 7", "C_BAR" and "C_Billy" are determined as internal winning roles, that is, in a game in which "flag is established", ART lottery is performed. In "flag establishment", a small winning combination with a low winning probability may be determined as an internal winning combination at the same time as the internal winning combination related to the bonus. Then, when a small winning combination with a low winning probability is determined as an internal winning combination, the probability of winning the ART is high.

Therefore, in a "flag-established" game in which a small winning combination with a low winning probability may be determined as an internal winning combination, an ART lottery is performed. Then, in the present embodiment, the ART lottery table referred to in the case of "flag establishment" is provided separately from the ART lottery table referred to in the case of "between non-flags".

77 to 82 are diagrams showing the configurations of the ART lottery table (No. 7) to the ART lottery table (No. 12), respectively. The ART lottery table (No. 7) to the ART lottery table (No. 12) are referred to when the setting is "Setting 6".

83 to 88 are diagrams showing the configurations of the ART lottery table (No. 13) to the ART lottery table (No. 18), respectively. The ART lottery table (No. 13) to the ART lottery table (No. 18) are referred to when there is a "penalty" (common to all settings).

In the present embodiment, for example, when the stop operation is performed in a push order (stop order) that is not recommended, "10" is given as a "penalty addition point". Then, when the total number of "penalty addition points" is "1" or more, the ART lottery is performed using the ART lottery table (not shown) for medium penalty. In addition, "penalty addition points" are deducted by "1" each time a unit game is executed.

When the sub-game state is "in CZ (chance zone)", there is a "penalty", and the game state is "between non-flags", the value of the lottery result is "between non-flags" as shown in FIG. There is a high probability that it will be "0 (off)". For example, even if the lottery flag A-1 is "7 (strong ice)" or "9 (strong cherry)", the value of the lottery result is always "0 (missing)".

[General and CZ medium ART stock area distribution lottery table]
Next, various general and ART stock area distribution lottery tables in CZ will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. The general and CZ medium ART stock area distribution lottery table is referred to when determining the stock area in which "D_ART" or "B_ART" wins in the non-ART and non-bonus ART lottery and stores the winning information. Will be done.

The ART stock area distribution lottery table in each general and CZ has a lottery result value (“0” or “1”) corresponding to the ART stock area and a lottery value set according to the value of the lottery flag A-1. The correspondence relationship of is shown.

In the stock area distribution lottery using the ART stock area distribution lottery table in each general and CZ, first, the random number extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The numerical value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value specified for each value of the lottery result. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won. The above-mentioned stock area distribution lottery is performed in the ART lottery process described later (see FIG. 249 described later).

FIG. 89 is a diagram showing the configuration of an ART stock area distribution lottery table (No. 1) in general and CZ. The general and CZ medium ART stock area distribution lottery table (No. 1) is referred to when "B_ART" is won. As shown in FIG. 89, when "B_ART" is won by the ART lottery in the "general state" and the "chance zone (CZ)", "0 (ART stock area A)" is always set as the value of the lottery result. It is determined.

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing the configuration of an ART stock area distribution lottery table (No. 2) in general and CZ. The general and CZ medium ART stock area distribution lottery table (No. 2) is referred to when "D_ART" is won. As shown in FIG. 90, when "D_ART" is won by the ART lottery in the "general state" and the "chance zone (CZ)", "0 (ART stock area A)" is always set as the value of the lottery result. It is determined. That is, in the present embodiment, regardless of which of the "D_ART" and "B_ART" ARTs is won in the "general state" and the "chance zone (CZ)", the winning information is stored in the ART stock area A. It is stored.

In the present embodiment, two ART stock areas (ART stock area A and ART stock area B) are provided in the sub storage area. The ART stock area A is an area in which the winning information of "D_ART" or "B_ART" scheduled to display (notify) that the winning is won in "ART" is stored. On the other hand, the ART stock area B is an area in which the winning information of "D_ART" or "B_ART" scheduled to hide (do not notify) the winning of the ART is stored.

At the time of ART lottery in the "general state" and "chance zone (CZ)", the winning information of ART is not stored in the ART stock area. Then, in the present embodiment, winning the ART in a state where the winning information of the ART is not stored in the ART stock area is referred to as "the first hit of the ART".

In the present embodiment, when the ART of "D_ART" or "B_ART" is won by the ART lottery in the "general state" and the "chance zone (CZ)", that is, when the "first hit of the ART" occurs. , As described in the general and CZ medium ART stock area distribution lottery tables of FIGS. 89 and 90, regardless of which of "D_ART" and "B_ART" is won, the winning information of ART is the ART in the sub storage area. It is stored in the stock area A. That is, when the "first hit of ART" occurs, it is always displayed (notified) that the ART of "D_ART" or "B_ART" has been won.

In the present embodiment, when the ART of "D_ART" is won at the time of "first hit of ART", the symbol corresponding to "D_ART" (for example, the character "Don-chan") is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. .. On the other hand, when the ART of "B_ART" is won at the time of "first hit of ART", the symbol corresponding to "B_ART" (for example, the character "Billy") is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. In addition, when the ARTs of "D_ART" and "B_ART" are duplicated and won at the time of "first hit of ART", the symbol corresponding to "D_ART" and the symbol corresponding to "B_ART" are simultaneously displayed on the liquid crystal display device. It is displayed in 11.

The display of the symbol corresponding to "D_ART" or "B_ART" is performed, for example, in the unit game (game) corresponding to "D_ART" or "B_ART". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbols corresponding to "D_ART" and "B_ART" may be displayed at an arbitrary timing (trigger) caused by the winning of "D_ART" and "B_ART". In this case, in this embodiment, the timing caused by the winning of "D_ART" or "B_ART" is the predetermined number of unit games (several times) from the unit game (game) winning "D_ART" or "B_ART". The timing should be within.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the symbol corresponding to the winning "ART" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the player can be made to recognize the type of the winning "ART". As a result, the player can be aware of the type of "ART" to be executed after that, and when the "ART" is executed (at the start), the type of the "ART" is not known and the playability is ambiguous. Will not be.

Further, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which "D_ART" and "B_ART" can be won in duplicate. Therefore, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the relevance of these two types of "ART" is enhanced, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, when "D_ART" and "B_ART" are duplicated and won, the symbol corresponding to "D_ART" and the symbol corresponding to "B_ART" are displayed at the same time, so that "D_ART" and "B_ART" are displayed at the same time. It is possible to clearly notify the player that the winning is duplicated with.

[Table number determination table at the time of stock in general and CZ]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, a table number determination table at the time of stock in general and CZ will be described. The table number determination table at the time of stock in general and CZ is when "D_ART" or "B_ART" wins in the ART lottery during non-ART and non-bonus and determines the table number which is a part of the winning information. Referenced to.

The table number determination table at the time of stock in general and CZ defines the table number set according to the value of the first lottery table type (“0” to “5”) and the value of the lottery flag A-1. .. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 91, when the table number determination table at the time of stock in general and CZ is referred to, "0" is always determined as the table number.

[ART lottery table at the time of fixed role]
Next, various fixed combination ART lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96. Each fixed winning combination ART lottery table is referred to when performing a fixed winning combination ART lottery. In each fixed winning combination ART lottery table, the correspondence between the lottery result values (“0” to “12”) corresponding to the winning contents of ART and the lottery values set according to the value of the lottery flag A-2. Is shown.

The “fixed winning combination” in the present embodiment means a game in which an internal winning combination that always wins some kind of ART is determined. Therefore, when the ART lottery is performed using the ART lottery table at the time of the fixed combination, a value other than "0 (missing)" is determined as the value of the lottery result.

In the ART lottery using the fixed combination ART lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is selected for each value of the lottery result. The lottery value specified in 1 is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a configuration of an ART lottery table (No. 1) at the time of a fixed combination. The fixed winning combination ART lottery table (No. 1) is referred to when the sub-game state is the "general state". Further, "0" is assigned as the value of the second lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 1) at the time of the fixed combination. The second lottery table type is used when determining the table number by referring to the table number determination table (see FIG. 97) at the time of stocking at the time of fixed combination, which will be described later.

When performing ART lottery with reference to the fixed winning combination ART lottery table (No. 1), for example, if the lottery flag A-2 is "2 (Billy bonus)", the lottery result value is "1 (B_ART win)". ) ”Is always decided.

FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a configuration of an ART lottery table (No. 2) at the time of a fixed combination. The fixed winning combination ART lottery table (No. 2) is referred to when the sub-game state is "chance zone (CZ)". Further, "1" is assigned as the value of the second lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 2) at the time of the fixed combination.

When performing ART lottery with reference to the fixed winning combination ART lottery table (No. 2), for example, if the lottery flag A-2 is "2 (Billy bonus)", the lottery result value is "4 (B_ART & G_ART win)". ) ”Is always decided.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a configuration of an ART lottery table (No. 3) at the time of a fixed combination. The fixed winning combination ART lottery table (No. 3) is referred to when the sub-game state is "general state" or "chance zone (CZ)" and the game period is "ART precursor". Further, "2" is assigned as the value of the second lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 3) at the time of the fixed combination. Here, the "ART precursor" is the period from the winning of the "ART" to the digestion of the number of ART precursor games determined by the lottery.

When performing ART lottery with reference to the fixed winning combination ART lottery table (3), for example, if the lottery flag A-2 is "2 (billy bonus)", the lottery result value is "7 (G_ART win)". ) ”Is always decided.

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a configuration of an ART lottery table (No. 4) at the time of a fixed combination. The ART lottery table at the time of the fixed combination (No. 4) shows that the sub-game state is "ART" and the sub-game state is "general state" or "chance zone" and the game period is "ART preparing". Referenced in some cases. Further, "3" is assigned as the value of the second lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 4) at the time of the fixed combination.

Here, "preparing for ART" means one or more game periods from the end of "precursor of ART" to the start of "ART". For example, when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state in the state where "ART precursor" is completed, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state in order to start "ART". There is a need. Therefore, if the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state at the end of "ART precursor", in the "ART preparing" game, while digesting one or more games, " The symbol combination (display combination) related to the "RT2 transition lip" is stopped and displayed, and the RT game state is shifted to the RT2 game state.

In the present embodiment, after the game of "ART precursor" is completed, the game of "ART" may be started without going through "Preparing for ART". In that case, the stop order for displaying the symbol combination (display combination) related to the "RT2 transition lip" is notified to "ART precursor" so that the RT game state is always shifted to the RT2 game state. To do. By performing such an operation, the game of "preparing for ART" is omitted.

When performing ART lottery with reference to the fixed winning combination ART lottery table (No. 4), for example, if the lottery flag A-2 is "2 (Billy bonus)", the value of the lottery result is "7 (G_ART winning)". ) ”Is always decided.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a configuration of an ART lottery table (No. 5) at the time of a fixed combination. The fixed combination ART lottery table (No. 5) is referred to when the sub-game state is "ART" and when the sub-game state is "ART" and "Viking Rush (VR)" is executed. Will be done. Further, "4" is assigned as the value of the second lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 5) at the time of the fixed combination.

When performing ART lottery with reference to the fixed winning combination ART lottery table (No. 5), for example, if the lottery flag A-2 is "1 (freeze + don)", the lottery result value is "12 (B_ART & D_ART & G_ART)". Winning & VR winning) ”will always be decided.

In the present embodiment, when "12 (B_ART & D_ART & G_ART winning & VR winning)" is determined as the value of the lottery result, the game lock is determined. Then, when the determined game lock occurs, the liquid crystal display device 11 corresponds to the symbol corresponding to "B_ART", the symbol corresponding to "D_ART", the symbol corresponding to "G_ART", and the symbol corresponding to "VR". The symbols are displayed at the same time. As a result, the player can recognize that "B_ART", "D_ART", "G_ART" and "VR" are duplicated and won.

[Table number determination table at the time of stock at the time of fixed role]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, a table number determination table at the time of stock at the time of fixed combination will be described. The table number determination table at the time of stock at the time of fixed winning combination is referred to when various "ART" wins and determines the table number which is a part of the winning information in the ART lottery at the time of fixed winning combination.

The table number determination table at the time of stocking at the time of fixed combination defines the table number set according to the value of the second lottery table type (“0” to “4”) and the value of the lottery flag A-2. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 97, when the value of the lottery flag A-2 is "2 (billy bonus)" and the value of the second table type is "4 (in VR)", "1" is determined as the table number. Further, when the value of the lottery flag A-2 is "2 (billy bonus)" and the value of the ART lottery table type is "0 (general middle)", "3" is determined as the table number. To.

[ART lottery table during B_ART]
Next, various ART lottery tables in B_ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 109. The ART lottery table in each B_ART is referred to when performing the ART lottery in "B_ART". The ART lottery table in each B_ART is set according to the value of the lottery result (“0” to “8” and “13” to “16”) corresponding to the winning content of ART and the value of the lottery flag A-3. The correspondence with the lottery value is shown.

In the ART lottery that refers to the ART lottery table during B_ART, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) are selected for each value of the lottery result. Subtract sequentially at the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ART lottery table (No. 1) during B_ART. The ART lottery table (No. 1) during B_ART has a setting of "setting 1", an ART mode of "ART mode 0" to "ART mode 1", a game state of "between non-flags", and It is referred to when the current game is "a game that determines the number of ART start G" or "the number of ART games is more than the last (remaining) 5G". Further, "0" is assigned as the value of the third lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 1) in B_ART. The third lottery table type is used when determining the table number by referring to the table number determination table (see FIG. 122 described later) at the time of stocking during B_ART and D_ART described later.

In the present embodiment, when the sub-game state is "B_ART" or "D_ART", four "ART modes" ("ART mode 0", "ART mode 1", "ART mode 2" and "ART mode 3") ") Is provided. Then, the ART lottery table during B_ART is provided corresponding to each "ART mode". Therefore, even if the games are in the same "B_ART", the probability of winning the "G_ART" can be different because the "ART mode" is different.

Further, the "game in which the number of ART start G (games) is determined" is a game in which "ART" is started. In the present embodiment, in the game in which "ART" is started, the number of ART start G is determined, and the determined ART start G number is set in the ART game number counter. Therefore, the subtraction operation of the ART game number counter is started from the game next to the game in which the ART start G number is determined. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the ART lottery table during B_ART to be referred to in the "game in which the number of ART start Gs is determined", which is the game in which "B_ART" is started, is defined.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ART lottery table (No. 2) during B_ART. The ART lottery table (No. 2) during B_ART has a setting of "setting 1", an ART mode of "ART mode 2", a game state of "non-flag", and the current game is "ART". It is referred to when the number of starting G games is determined or the number of ART games is "more than the last (remaining) 5G". Further, "1" is assigned as the value of the third lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 2) during B_ART.

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a configuration of an ART lottery table (No. 3) during B_ART. The ART lottery table (No. 3) during B_ART has a setting of "setting 1", an ART mode of "ART mode 3", a game state of "non-flag", and the current game is "ART". It is referred to when the number of starting G games is determined or the number of ART games is "more than the last (remaining) 5G". Further, "2" is assigned as the value of the third lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 3) during B_ART.

FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a configuration of an ART lottery table (No. 4) during B_ART. The ART lottery table (No. 4) during B_ART has a setting of "setting 1", an ART mode of "ART mode 0" to "ART mode 3", a game state of "between non-flags", and It is referred to when the number of ART games is "last (remaining) 5G or less". Further, "3" is assigned as the value of the third lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 4) in B_ART.

In the present embodiment, when the number of ART games of "B_ART" becomes "last (remaining) 5G or less", even if the "ART mode" is different, the common ART lottery table during B_ART is referred to. Then, in the present embodiment, when the number of ART games of "B_ART" is "last (remaining) 5G or less", the number of ART games is "more than the last (remaining) 5G", and the "ART" is won. The lottery value is set so that the probability is low.

Therefore, in a state where the number of ART games of "B_ART" is "last (remaining) 5G or less", a continuous production that notifies whether or not the next "ART" is started after this "B_ART" is completed. In the case of performing, the probability of winning "ART" in the middle of the continuous production can be reduced. As a result, the chance of notifying the winning of "ART" in the middle of the continuous production during "B_ART" is reduced, and it is possible to prevent the continuous production having a sense of discomfort from being executed.

FIG. 102 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ART lottery table (No. 5) during B_ART. The setting of the ART lottery table during B_ART (No. 5) is "setting 1", the ART mode is "ART mode 0" to "ART mode 3", and the game state is "flag established (BB, RB established)". And it is referred to when the current game is "a game that determines the number of ART start G" or "the number of ART games is more than the last (remaining) 5G". Further, "4" is assigned as the value of the third lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 5) in B_ART.

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ART lottery table (No. 6) during B_ART. The ART lottery table (No. 6) during B_ART has a setting of "setting 1", an ART mode of "ART mode 0" to "ART mode 3", and a game state of "flag established (BB, RB established)". It is referred to when the number of ART games is "last (remaining) 5G or less". Further, "5" is assigned as the value of the third lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 6) during B_ART.

FIGS. 104 to 109 are diagrams showing the configurations of the ART lottery table in B_ART (No. 7) to the ART lottery table in B_ART (No. 12), respectively. The ART lottery table during B_ART (No. 7) to the ART lottery table during B_ART (No. 12) are referred to when the setting is "Setting 6".

As shown in the various B_ART ART lottery tables in FIGS. 98 to 109 described above, when ART lottery is performed using the B_ART ART lottery table, the lottery flag A-3 is set to "6 (weak ice)" or "7 (7). If it is "strong ice)", "7 (G_ART win)" may be determined as the value of the lottery result. For example, when referring to the ART lottery table (No. 1) in B_ART shown in FIG. 98, if the lottery flag A-3 is "7 (strong ice)", there is a 1/2 probability of the value of the lottery result. "7 (G_ART winning)" is determined as.

As described above, the internal winning combination related to "weak ice" (small combination / replay data pointer "10") and "strong ice" (small combination / replay data pointer "11") is the "small combination / replay data pointer" 11 ") according to the present invention. It shows a specific example of "the first special role". Further, the internal winning combination related to "weak cherry" (small role / replay data pointer "12") and "strong cherry" (small role / replay data pointer "13", "14") is the "first winning combination" according to the present invention. This is a specific example of "2 special roles". Therefore, when the "first special role" is determined as the internal winning combination during the "B_ART" in the second assist state, the ART lottery of the game is performed more than when the "second special role" is determined. In, there is a high probability of winning the "G_ART" which is the third assist state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "second special role" is determined as the internal winning combination during the "B_ART" which is the second assist state, the case where the "first special role" is determined is higher than the case where the "first special role" is determined. Number of additional games There is a high probability that the number of additional games will be determined in the lottery. That is, when the "second special role" is determined as the internal winning combination during "B_ART", the number of ART games is expected to be increased as compared with the case where the "first special role" is determined.

[ART lottery table during D_ART]
Next, various ART lottery tables in D_ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 121. The ART lottery table in each D_ART is referred to when performing the ART lottery in "D_ART". The ART lottery table in each D_ART is set according to the value of the lottery result ("0" to "8" and "13" to "16") corresponding to the winning content of ART and the value of the lottery flag A-3. The correspondence with the lottery value is shown.

An ART lottery table during D_ART is provided for each ART mode. Therefore, even in the same "D_ART", the probability of winning the "G_ART" can be different because the "ART mode" is different.

In the ART lottery that refers to the ART lottery table during D_ART, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) are selected for each value of the lottery result. Subtract sequentially at the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a configuration of an ART lottery table (No. 1) during D_ART. The ART lottery table (No. 1) during D_ART has a setting of "setting 1", an ART mode of "ART mode 1" to "ART mode 0", a game state of "between non-flags", and It is referred to when the current game is "a game that determines the number of ART start G" or "the number of ART games is more than the last (remaining) 5G". Further, "6" is assigned as the value of the third lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 1) during D_ART.

FIG. 111 is a diagram showing a configuration of an ART lottery table (No. 2) during D_ART. The ART lottery table (No. 2) during D_ART has a setting of "setting 1", an ART mode of "ART mode 2", a game state of "non-flag", and the current game is "ART". It is referred to when the number of starting G games is determined or the number of ART games is "more than the last (remaining) 5G". Further, "7" is assigned as the value of the third lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 2) during D_ART.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ART lottery table (No. 3) during D_ART. The setting of the ART lottery table during D_ART (No. 3) is "Setting 1", the ART mode is "ART mode 3", the game state is "non-flag", and the current game is "ART". It is referred to when the number of starting G games is determined or the number of ART games is "more than the last (remaining) 5G". Further, "8" is assigned as the value of the third lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 3) during D_ART.

FIG. 113 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ART lottery table (No. 4) during D_ART. The ART lottery table (No. 4) during D_ART has a setting of "setting 1", an ART mode of "ART mode 0" to "ART mode 3", a game state of "between non-flags", and It is referred to when the number of ART games is "last (remaining) 5G or less". Further, "9" is assigned as the value of the third lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 4) during D_ART.

In the present embodiment, when the number of ART games of "D_ART" becomes "last (remaining) 5G or less", even if the "ART mode" is different, the common ART lottery table during D_ART is referred to. Then, in the present embodiment, when the number of ART games of "D_ART" is "last (remaining) 5G or less", the number of ART games is "more than the last (remaining) 5G", and the "ART" is won. The lottery value is set so that the probability is low. Therefore, the chance of notifying the winning of "ART" in the middle of the continuous production during "D_ART" is reduced, and it is possible to prevent the continuous production having a sense of discomfort from being executed.

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ART lottery table (No. 5) during D_ART. The ART lottery table (No. 5) during D_ART has a setting of "setting 1", an ART mode of "ART mode 0" to "ART mode 3", and a game state of "flag established (BB, RB established)". And it is referred to when the current game is "a game that determines the number of ART start G" or "the number of ART games is more than the last (remaining) 5G". Further, "10" is assigned as the value of the third lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 5) during D_ART.

FIG. 115 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ART lottery table (No. 6) during D_ART. The ART lottery table (No. 6) during D_ART has a setting of "setting 1", an ART mode of "ART mode 0" to "ART mode 3", and a game state of "flag established (BB, RB established)". It is referred to when the number of ART games is "last (remaining) 5G or less". Further, "11" is assigned as the value of the third lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 6) during D_ART.

FIGS. 116 to 121 are diagrams showing the configurations of the ART lottery table in D_ART (No. 7) to the ART lottery table in D_ART (No. 12), respectively. The ART lottery table during D_ART (No. 7) to the ART lottery table during D_ART (No. 12) are referred to when the setting is "Setting 6".

As shown in the various ART lottery tables in D_ART of FIGS. 110 to 121 described above, when the ART lottery is performed using the ART lottery table in D_ART, the lottery flag A-3 is set to "8 (weak cherry)" or "9 ( If it is "strong cherry", "7 (G_ART win)" may be determined as the value of the lottery result. For example, when referring to the ART lottery table (No. 1) in D_ART shown in FIG. 110, if the lottery flag A-3 is "9 (strong cherry)", there is a 1/4 probability of the value of the lottery result. "7 (G_ART winning)" is determined as.

As mentioned above, the internal winning combination related to "weak cherry" (small role / replay data pointer "12") and "strong cherry" (small role / replay data pointer "13", "14") is a book. It shows a specific example of "the second special role" which concerns on invention. Further, the internal winning combination related to "weak ice" (small role / replay data pointer "10") and "strong ice" (small combination / replay data pointer "11") is the "first special role" according to the present invention. A specific example of the above is shown. Therefore, when the "second special role" is determined as the internal winning combination during the "D_ART" which is the first assist state, the ART lottery of the game is performed more than when the "first special role" is determined. In, there is a high probability of winning the "G_ART" which is the third assist state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "first special role" is determined as the internal winning combination during the "D_ART" which is the first assist state, the case where the "second special role" is determined is higher than the case where the "second special role" is determined. There is a high probability that the continuous stock will win in the continuous stock lottery. That is, when the "first special role" is determined as the internal winning combination during "D_ART", the next set of "D_ART" is expected to be executed more than when the "second special role" is determined. Will be done.

[Table number determination table at the time of stock during B_ART and D_ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the table number determination table at the time of stock during B_ART and D_ART will be described. The table number determination table at the time of stock during B_ART and D_ART is used when various "ARTs" win and determine the table number which is a part of the winning information in the ART lottery during "B_ART" or "D_ART". Referenced.

The table number determination table at the time of stock during B_ART and D_ART defines the table number set according to the value of the third lottery table type ("0" to "11") and the value of the lottery flag A-3. To do. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 122, when the table number determination table at the time of stock during B_ART and D_ART is referred to, "1" is always determined as the table number.

[ART lottery table during G_ART]
Next, various ART lottery tables in G_ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 128. The ART lottery table in each G_ART is referred to when performing the ART lottery in "G_ART". The ART lottery table in each G_ART is set according to the value of the lottery result ("0" to "6", "8" and "16") corresponding to the winning contents of ART and the value of the lottery flag A-3. The correspondence with the lottery value is shown.

In the ART lottery that refers to the ART lottery table during G_ART, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) are selected for each value of the lottery result. Subtract sequentially at the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

FIG. 123 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ART lottery table (No. 1) during G_ART. The ART lottery table during G_ART (No. 1) is referred to when the coalescence mode is "coalescence mode 0" and the gaming state is "between non-flags". Further, "0" is assigned as the value of the fourth lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 1) in G_ART. The fourth lottery table type is used when determining the table number by referring to the table number determination table (see FIG. 131 described later) at the time of stocking during G_ART and R_ART described later.

In the present embodiment, when the sub-game state is "G_ART" or "R_ART", three "coalescence modes" ("coalescence mode 0", "coalescence mode 1" and "coalescence mode 2") are provided. Therefore, even in the same "G_ART", the probability of winning "B_ART" or "D_ART" can be different because the "combination mode" is different.

FIG. 124 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ART lottery table (No. 2) during G_ART. The ART lottery table during G_ART (No. 2) is referred to when the coalescence mode is "coalescence mode 1" and the gaming state is "between non-flags". Further, "1" is assigned as the value of the fourth lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 2) in G_ART.

FIG. 125 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ART lottery table (No. 3) during G_ART. The ART lottery table during G_ART (No. 3) is referred to when the coalescence mode is "coalescence mode 2" and the gaming state is "between non-flags". Further, "2" is assigned as the value of the fourth lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 3) during G_ART.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a configuration of an ART lottery table (No. 4) during G_ART. The ART lottery table during G_ART (No. 4) is referred to when the coalescence mode is "coalescence mode 0" and the gaming state is "flag established (BB, RB established)". Further, "3" is assigned as the value of the fourth lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 4) in G_ART.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a configuration of an ART lottery table (No. 5) during G_ART. The ART lottery table during G_ART (No. 5) is referred to when the coalescence mode is "coalescence mode 1" and the gaming state is "flag established (BB, RB established)". Further, "4" is assigned as the value of the fourth lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 5) in G_ART.

FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a configuration of an ART lottery table (No. 6) during G_ART. The ART lottery table during G_ART (No. 6) is referred to when the coalescence mode is "coalescence mode 2" and the gaming state is "flag established (BB, RB established)". Further, "5" is assigned as the value of the fourth lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 6) during G_ART.

As shown in the various ART lottery tables in G_ART of FIGS. 123 to 128 described above, when the ART lottery is performed with reference to the ART lottery table in G_ART, the lottery flag A-3 is set to "6 (weak ice)" or "7". If it is "(strong ice)", "2 (D_ART win)" may be determined as the value of the lottery result. For example, when referring to the ART lottery table (No. 1) in G_ART shown in FIG. 123, if the lottery flag A-3 is "7 (strong ice)", there is a probability of 32256/32768 of the lottery result value. "2 (D_ART winning)" is determined as.

As described above, the internal winning combination related to "weak ice" (small combination / replay data pointer "10") and "strong ice" (small combination / replay data pointer "11") is the "small combination / replay data pointer" 11 ") according to the present invention. It shows a specific example of "the first special role". Further, the internal winning combination related to "weak cherry" (small role / replay data pointer "12") and "strong cherry" (small role / replay data pointer "13", "14") is the "first winning combination" according to the present invention. This is a specific example of "2 special roles". Therefore, when the "first special role" is determined as the internal winning combination during the "G_ART" which is the third assist state, the ART lottery of the game is performed more than when the "second special role" is determined. In, the probability of winning the first assist state "D_ART" is high.

In addition, when ART lottery is performed using the ART lottery table during G_ART, if the lottery flag A-3 is "8 (weak cherry)" or "9 (strong cherry)", the lottery result value is "1 (B_ART)". Winning) ”may be decided. For example, when referring to the ART lottery table (No. 1) in G_ART shown in FIG. 123, if the lottery flag A-3 is "9 (strong cherry)", there is a probability of 32512/32768 of the lottery result value. As "1 (B_ART winning)" is determined.

Therefore, when the "second special role" is determined as the internal winning combination during the "G_ART" which is the third assist state, the ART lottery of the game is performed more than when the "first special role" is determined. In, the probability of winning the second assist state "B_ART" is high.

[ART lottery table during R_ART]
Next, various ART lottery tables in R_ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. The ART lottery table in each R_ART is referred to when performing the ART lottery in "R_ART". The ART lottery table in each R_ART is set according to the value of the lottery result ("0" to "6", "8" and "16") corresponding to the winning content of ART and the value of the lottery flag A-3. The correspondence with the lottery value is shown.

In the ART lottery that refers to the ART lottery table during R_ART, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) are selected for each value of the lottery result. Subtract sequentially at the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a configuration of an ART lottery table (No. 1) during R_ART. The ART lottery table (No. 1) during R_ART is referred to when the gaming state is "between non-flags". Further, "6" is assigned as the value of the fourth lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 1) during R_ART.

FIG. 130 is a diagram showing a configuration of an ART lottery table (No. 2) during R_ART. The ART lottery table during R_ART (No. 2) is referred to when the game state is "flag established (BB, RB established)". Further, "7" is assigned as the value of the fourth lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 2) during R_ART.

As shown in the various ART lottery tables in R_ART of FIGS. 129 and 130 described above, when the ART lottery is performed with reference to the ART lottery table in R_ART, the lottery flag A-3 is set to "6 (weak ice)" or "7". If it is "(strong ice)", "2 (D_ART win)" may be determined as the value of the lottery result. For example, when referring to the ART lottery table (No. 1) in G_ART shown in FIG. 129, if the lottery flag A-3 is "7 (strong ice)", the value of the lottery result is "2 (D_ART win)". Is always decided.

As described above, the internal winning combination related to "weak ice" (small combination / replay data pointer "10") and "strong ice" (small combination / replay data pointer "11") is the "small combination / replay data pointer" 11 ") according to the present invention. It shows a specific example of "the first special role". Further, the internal winning combination related to "weak cherry" (small role / replay data pointer "12") and "strong cherry" (small role / replay data pointer "13", "14") is the "first winning combination" according to the present invention. This is a specific example of "2 special roles". Therefore, when the "first special role" is determined as the internal winning combination during "R_ART", the first assist state is determined in the ART lottery of the game than when the "second special role" is determined. There is a high probability of winning "D_ART".

In addition, when ART lottery is performed with reference to the ART lottery table during R_ART, if the lottery flag A-3 is "8 (weak cherry)" or "9 (strong cherry)", the lottery result value is "1 ( B_ART winning) ”may be decided. For example, when referring to the ART lottery table (No. 1) in R_ART shown in FIG. 129, if the lottery flag A-3 is "9 (strong cherry)", the value of the lottery result is "1 (B_ART win)". Is always decided.

Therefore, when the "second special role" is determined as the internal winning combination during "R_ART", the second assist state is determined in the ART lottery of the game than when the "first special role" is determined. There is a high probability of winning "B_ART".

[Table number determination table at the time of stock during G_ART and R_ART]
Next, the table number determination table at the time of stock during G_ART and R_ART will be described with reference to FIG. 131. The table number determination table at the time of stock during G_ART or R_ART is used when various "ARTs" win and determine the table number which is a part of the winning information in the ART lottery during "G_ART" or "R_ART". Referenced.

The table number determination table at the time of stock during G_ART and R_ART defines the table number set according to the value of the fourth lottery table type ("0" to "7") and the value of the lottery flag A-3. To do. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 131, when the table number determination table at the time of stock during G_ART and R_ART is referred to, "1" is always determined as the table number.

[ART stock area distribution lottery table during ART]
Next, the ART stock area distribution lottery table in various ARTs will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 to 135. The ART stock area distribution lottery table in various ARTs is referred to when "D_ART" or "B_ART" wins in the ART lottery in various ARTs and determines the stock area for storing the information.

In each ART, the ART stock area distribution lottery table has a lottery result value (“0” or “1”) corresponding to the type of the ART stock area and a lottery value set according to the value of the lottery flag A-3. The correspondence relationship of is shown.

In the stock area distribution lottery using the ART stock area distribution lottery table during ART, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is used. The lottery value specified for each lottery result value is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won. The above-mentioned stock area distribution lottery is performed in the ART lottery process described later (see FIG. 249 described later).

FIG. 132 is a diagram showing a configuration of an ART stock area distribution lottery table (No. 1) during ART. The ART stock area distribution lottery table during ART (No. 1) is referred to when the ART of "B_ART" is won in the game states of "all ARTs other than the coalescence mode 2 during G_ART" and "all in preparation". To.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 132, when the ART of "B_ART" is won by the ART lottery during the above-mentioned ART, if the lottery flag A-3 is "6 (weak ice)", "1 (ART stock area B)" is determined as the value of the lottery result with a probability of about 1/5.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing a configuration of an ART stock area distribution lottery table (No. 2) during ART. The ART stock area distribution lottery table during ART (No. 2) is referred to when the ART of "D_ART" is won in the game states of "all ARTs other than the coalescence mode 2 during G_ART" and "all in preparation". To.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 133, when the ART of "D_ART" is won by the ART lottery during the above-mentioned ART, if the lottery flag A-3 is "6 (weak ice)", "1 (ART stock area B)" is determined as the value of the lottery result with a probability of about 1/5.

FIG. 134 is a diagram showing the configuration of an ART stock area distribution lottery table (No. 3) during ART. The ART stock area distribution lottery table during ART (No. 3) is referred to when the ART of "B_ART" is won in the gaming state of "during ART of coalescence mode 2 during G_ART (not included during preparation)".

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 134, when "B_ART" is won by the above-mentioned ART lottery during ART, if the lottery flag A-3 is "6 (weak ice)", the lottery result is obtained. As a value, "0 (ART stock area A)" is always determined.

FIG. 135 is a diagram showing the configuration of an ART stock area distribution lottery table (No. 4) during ART. The ART stock area distribution lottery table during ART (No. 4) is referred to when the ART of "D_ART" is won in the gaming state of "during ART of coalescence mode 2 during G_ART (not included during preparation)".

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135, when "D_ART" is won by the above-mentioned ART lottery during ART, if the lottery flag A-3 is "6 (weak ice)", the lottery result is obtained. As a value, "0 (ART stock area A)" is always determined.

In the present embodiment, the winning information of "D_ART" or "B_ART" stored in the "ART stock area A" is notified in principle. However, the winning information of "D_ART" or "B_ART" stored in the "ART stock area A" may not be displayed (notified). This is because it is determined whether or not to display (notify) the winning information stored in the "ART stock area A" based on the effect lottery processing performed for each game, which will be described later. The winning information of "D_ART" or "B_ART" stored in the "ART stock area B" is not always displayed (notified).

[ART lottery table during bonus (BB, billy bonus)]
Next, the ART lottery table among various bonuses (BB, billy bonus) will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 and 137. The ART lottery table in each bonus (BB, Billy bonus) is referred to when performing the ART lottery in the bonus. In each bonus (BB, billy bonus), the ART lottery table is a lottery set according to the value of the lottery result ("0" to "14") corresponding to the winning content of ART and the value of the lottery flag B-1. The correspondence with the value is shown.

In the ART lottery that refers to the ART lottery table during the bonus (BB, billy bonus), first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is displayed. The lottery value specified for each lottery result value is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

FIG. 136 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ART lottery table (No. 1) during the bonus (BB, Billy bonus). The ART lottery table (No. 1) during the bonus (BB, Billy bonus) is referred to when "base ART is not set". Further, "0" is assigned as the value of the fifth lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 1) in the bonus (BB, Billy bonus). The fifth lottery table type is used when determining the table number by referring to the table number determination table at the time of stock during bonus (see FIG. 138 described later) described later.

FIG. 137 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ART lottery table (No. 2) during the bonus (BB, Billy bonus). The ART lottery table (No. 2) during the bonus (BB, Billy bonus) is referred to when the "base ART is set". Further, "1" is assigned as the value of the fifth lottery table type to the ART lottery table (No. 2) in the bonus (BB, Billy bonus).

Here, "base ART is not set" means that the sub-game state before the bonus was activated was not "ART". That is, when the "base ART is not set", the sub-game state shifts to the "general state" or the "chance zone" when the bonus operation is completed.

On the other hand, "base ART is set" means that the sub-game state before the bonus was activated was any "ART". That is, when the "base ART is set", the sub-game state returns to "ART" when the bonus operation is completed. In addition, while the bonus is operating, the sub-game state shifts to "bonus".

Specifically, if "0" is stored in the "ART identification data storage area" of the sub storage area (see FIG. 218 described later) described later (if "1" or "2" is not stored). , It is determined that "base ART is not set". Further, if "1" or "2" is stored in the "ART identification data storage area", it is determined that the "base ART is set". When "1" is stored in the "ART identification data storage area", the "base ART" is "D_ART", and when "2" is stored in the "ART identification data storage area". , "Base ART" is "B_ART".

[Table number determination table at the time of stock during bonus]
Next, the table number determination table at the time of stock during the bonus will be described with reference to FIG. 138. The table number determination table at the time of stock during the bonus is referred to when various "ARTs" win and determine the table number which is a part of the winning information in the ART lottery in which the bonus is operating.

The table number determination table at the time of stock during the bonus defines the table number set according to the value of the fifth lottery table type (“0” or “1”) and the value of the lottery flag B-1. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 138, when the table number determination table at the time of stock during bonus is referred to, if the value of the lottery flag B-1 is "2 (BB_JAC)", the fifth lottery table "3" is determined as the table number regardless of the value of the type.

[Special ART lottery table]
Next, various special ART lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 and 140. Each special ART lottery table has a lottery result value (“0” to “14”) corresponding to the winning content of the ART, and a lottery value set according to the presence / absence (set / unset) of the “base ART”. The correspondence of is shown.

In the ART lottery that refers to the special ART lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is defined for each value of the lottery result. The lottery value is subtracted sequentially. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

FIG. 139 is a diagram showing the configuration of a special ART lottery table (No. 1). The special ART lottery table (No. 1) is referred to when the game state is "at the end of the bonus (during the billy bonus)". Further, "0" is assigned as the value of the sixth lottery table type to the special ART lottery table (No. 1). It is used when determining the table number by referring to the table number determination table at the time of special ART (see FIG. 141 described later) described later.

Here, "when the bonus is completed" means that during the operation of the billy bonus (BB3 game state), the combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination in which the payout of medals is "1" is displayed 15 times, and billy It was when the bonus was over. Therefore, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination in which the payout of medals is "15" is displayed and the billy bonus ends, it does not correspond to "when the bonus is completed".

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 139, when the game state is "at the time of completing the bonus", "5 (D_ART & G_ART winning)" is always determined as the value of the lottery result. That is, when the bonus is completed, the player always wins the "ART".

FIG. 140 is a diagram showing the configuration of a special ART lottery table (No. 2). The special ART lottery table (No. 2) is referred to when the game state is "at the ceiling". Further, "1" is assigned as the value of the sixth lottery table type to the special ART lottery table (No. 1). Here, "at the ceiling" is when a predetermined number of games are consumed after the end of the bonus.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 140, when the gaming state is “at the ceiling”, “6 (B_ART & D_ART & G_ART winning)” is always determined as the value of the lottery result. That is, at the time of "ceiling", the "ART" is always won.

[Table number determination table for special ART]
Next, the table number determination table at the time of special ART will be described with reference to FIG. 141. The table number determination table at the time of special ART is referred to when various "ARTs" win and determine the table number which is a part of the winning information in the ART lottery at "bonus completion" and "ceiling". ..

The table number determination table at the time of special ART is the table number set according to the value of the 6th lottery table type ("0" or "1") and the presence / absence of "base ART" (set / unset). Prescribe. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 141, when the table number determination table at the time of special ART is referred to, "base ART is not set" and the value of the sixth lottery table type is "0 (bonus completion). When) ”,“ 5 ”is determined as the table number.

[ART stock non-consumption lottery table]
Next, various ART stock non-consumption lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143. Each ART stock non-consumption lottery table has a correspondence relationship between the lottery result value (“0” or “1”) corresponding to “consumption” and “non-consumption” and the lottery value set according to the table number. Shown.

In the present embodiment, the ART stock non-consumption lottery is performed every time the "D_ART" or "B_ART" stored in the "ART stock area A" or the "ART stock area B" is started. In this ART stock non-consumption lottery, whether or not to delete (consume) the winning information of the starting "D_ART" or "B_ART" from the "ART stock area A" or "ART stock area B" (non-consumption) is determined by ART. Lottery is done with reference to the stock non-consumption lottery table.

That is, in the present embodiment, when "non-consumption" is won in the ART stock non-consumption lottery, the "D_ART" or "B_ART" stored in the "ART stock area A" or the "ART stock area B" Do not delete the winning information. As a result, two "ARTs" are started using the winning information of one "ART".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ART stock non-consumption lottery is performed every time the "D_ART" or "B_ART" stored in the "ART stock area A" or the "ART stock area B" is started. Therefore, if the "non-consumption" is continuously won in the ART stock non-consumption lottery, a plurality of "ART" is started using the same "ART" winning information.

In the ART stock non-consumption lottery that refers to the ART stock non-consumption lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is selected as a lottery result. The lottery value specified for each value of is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

FIG. 142 is a diagram showing the configuration of an ART stock non-consumption lottery table (No. 1). The ART stock non-consumption lottery table (No. 1) is referred to when the setting is "Setting 1".

In the present embodiment, for example, when the ART stock non-consumption lottery table (No. 1) is referred to, if the table number in the winning information of the "ART" to be started is "0", 256/32768. "1 (non-consumed)" is determined as the value of the lottery result with the probability of.

FIG. 143 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ART stock non-consumption lottery table (No. 2). The ART stock non-consumption lottery table (No. 2) is referred to when the setting is "Setting 6".

In the present embodiment, for example, when the ART stock non-consumption lottery table (No. 2) is referred to, if the table number in the winning information of the "ART" to be started is "0", 384/32768. "1 (non-consumed)" is determined as the value of the lottery result with the probability of.

[Stock content judgment table of ART lottery results]
Next, the stock content determination table of the ART lottery result will be described with reference to FIG. 144. The stock content determination table of the ART lottery result shows the correspondence relationship between the value of the lottery result (“0” to “16”) corresponding to the winning content of ART and the stock content of various “ART” and “VR”.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 144, when "6" is determined as the value of the lottery result by any of the ART lottery, the winning information of "B_ART", the winning information of "D_ART", and The winning information of "G_ART" is stored in the sub storage area (see FIG. 218 described later) described later.

[Billy touch when VR is locked Lottery table for correct / incorrect answers]
Next, with reference to FIG. 145, a lottery table of billy touch correct answer / incorrect answer at the time of VR lock will be described. The billy touch correct / incorrect answer lottery table at the time of VR lock is referred to when the billy touch correct / incorrect answer is drawn at the time of VR lock.

In the present embodiment, when a VR lock (game lock 9) is determined during various "ARTs", a "VR (Viking Rush)" is won (see FIGS. 94 to 96). Then, when the "VR" wins, the billy touch correct / incorrect answer is drawn, and the correct / incorrect answer of the player's touch operation on the left character (billy) decoration unit 22L and the right character decoration unit 22R is determined.

After that, VR lock (game lock 9) is executed, and information to that effect is notified to the player so that either the left character decoration unit 22L or the right character decoration unit 22R is selected and touched. That is, at the time of VR lock, the alternative effect is performed as in the case of "VR (Viking Rush)". Then, when the character decoration part touched by the player is the correct answer, "VR" is started.

The billy touch correct / incorrect answer lottery table at the time of VR lock is the lottery result value (“0” to “6”) corresponding to the judgment contents of the correct / incorrect touch for the left character decoration unit 22L and the right character decoration unit 22R. ) And the lottery value set according to the type of sub-game state.

Refer to the billy touch correct / incorrect answer lottery table at the time of VR lock In the billy touch correct / incorrect answer lottery, first, from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The extracted random number values are sequentially subtracted by the lottery values specified for each lottery result value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

Billy touch when VR is locked In the correct / incorrect answer lottery table, the content corresponding to the lottery result value "0" is when there is a touch on the right character decoration part 22R, or the left character decoration part 22L and the right character. The correct answer is when there is no touch on the decorative part 22R. Further, the content corresponding to the lottery result value "1" is correct when there is a touch on the right character decoration part 22R, and when there is no touch on the left character decoration part 22L and the right character decoration part 22R. Make it incorrect.

The content corresponding to the lottery result value "2" is correct when there is a touch on the left character decoration part 22L or when there is no touch on the left character decoration part 22L and the right character decoration part 22R. .. Further, the content corresponding to the lottery result value "3" is correct when there is a touch on the left character decoration part 22L, and when there is no touch on the left character decoration part 22L and the right character decoration part 22R. Make it incorrect.

Further, the content corresponding to the lottery result value "4" is the correct answer (both are correct) regardless of whether the left character decoration section 22L or the right character decoration section 22R is touched, and the left character decoration section 22L and the right The answer is correct even if there is no touch on the character decoration unit 22R. Further, the content corresponding to the lottery result value "5" is incorrect even if either the left character decoration unit 22L or the right character decoration unit 22R is touched (both are incorrect answers), and the left character decoration unit Even if there is no touch on 22L and the right character decoration part 22R, the answer is incorrect.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 145, the lottery value set for the lottery result value "5" is "0" regardless of the type of the sub-game state, and is used as the lottery result value. "5" is not decided. That is, in the present embodiment, when the VR lock (game lock 9) is executed, the correct answer is to touch at least one of the left character decoration unit 22L and the right character decoration unit 22R.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 145, the sub-game state when the billy touch correct / incorrect answer is drawn is "general (RT2 at the end of ART)", "B_ART" or "D_ART". In the case of, any one of "0" to "3" is won as the value of the lottery result. The winning probability of each of the lottery result values "0" to "3" is 8192/32768 (1/4).

Therefore, when the VR lock (game lock 9) is executed in "general (RT2 at the end of ART)", "B_ART" or "D_ART", the left character decoration unit 22L and the right character decoration unit 22R If you touch either one, there is a 1/2 chance that the answer will be correct. Further, in this case, even if neither the left character decoration portion 22L nor the right character decoration portion 22R is touched (even if the player does not participate in the production), the correct answer is obtained with a probability of 1/2.

On the other hand, when the sub-game state when the billy touch correct / incorrect answer is drawn is "G_ART", "R_ART" or "in VR", "4" is always won as the value of the lottery result. That is, when the VR lock (game lock 9) is executed in "G_ART", "R_ART" or "in VR", "VR (Viking Rush)" is always started.

[Billy touch lottery table in VR]
Next, various VR medium billy touch lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 to 149. The billy touch lottery table in each VR is referred to when the billy touch correct answer / incorrect answer is drawn during "VR (Viking Rush)". In the VR middle billy touch lottery table, the lottery result values (“0” to “6”) corresponding to the judgment contents of the correct / incorrect touch for the left character decoration part 22L and the right character decoration part 22R, and the “lottery flag” The correspondence with the value of "A-3" or the lottery value set according to the type of the established bonus is shown.

In the billy touch correct / incorrect answer lottery that refers to the billy touch lottery table in VR, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is selected. , The lottery value specified for each lottery result value is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

FIG. 146 is a diagram showing the configuration of a billy touch lottery table (No. 1) in VR. The billy touch lottery table in VR (No. 1) is referred to when the gaming state is "between non-flags".

When referring to the billy touch lottery table (No. 1) in VR, as shown in FIG. 146, when the value of the lottery flag A-3 is "1" to "5", the left character decoration portion 22L and the right If you touch either one of the character decoration units 22R, the answer will be correct with a probability of 1/2. Further, in this case, even if neither the left character decoration portion 22L nor the right character decoration portion 22R is touched (even if the player does not participate in the production), the correct answer is obtained with a probability of 1/2.

FIG. 147 is a diagram showing the configuration of a billy touch lottery table (No. 2) in VR. The billy touch lottery table during VR (No. 2) is referred to when the gaming state is "in Viking Rush Extra" and "between non-flags".

When referring to the billy touch lottery table (No. 2) in VR, as shown in FIG. 147, when the value of the lottery flag A-3 is "1" to "5", the left character decoration portion 22L and the right Even if one of the character decoration units 22R is touched, the correct answer is obtained with a probability of 1/2 regardless of which one is touched.

FIG. 148 is a diagram showing the configuration of a billy touch lottery table (No. 3) in VR. The billy touch lottery table in VR (No. 3) is referred to when the game state is "when the bonus is established". Further, FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a configuration of a billy touch lottery table (No. 4) in VR. The billy touch lottery table during VR (No. 4) is referred to when the game state is "during Viking Rush Extra" and "when the bonus is established".

When the bonus is established during "VR", as shown in FIGS. 148 and 149, "4" is always won as the value of the lottery result in the billy touch lottery. That is, in this case, the correct answer is always obtained regardless of whether or not one of the left character decoration unit 22L and the right character decoration unit 22R is touched.

[VR medium revolution lottery table]
Next, various VR medium revolution lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 to 164. Each VR medium revolution lottery table is referred to when performing a revolutionary lottery during "VR (Viking Rush)". The revolutionary lottery is performed for each touch challenge (touch effect) in "VR".

Each VR medium revolution lottery table depends on the value of the lottery result ("0" or "1") corresponding to the presence or absence of "revolution activation", the value of "lottery flag A-3", or the type of bonus established. The correspondence with the set lottery value is shown. In the revolution lottery, if "revolution activation" is won, all the results of the touch challenge (touch production) up to that point will be rewritten to the correct answer.

In the revolutionary lottery that refers to the VR medium revolution lottery table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) are selected for each value of the lottery result. Subtract sequentially at the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing the configuration of a VR medium revolution lottery table (No. 1). The VR medium revolution lottery table (No. 1) is referred to when the setting is "setting 1", the gaming state is "between non-flags", and the number of touch challenges is the first. FIG. 151 is a diagram showing the configuration of a VR medium revolution lottery table (No. 2). The VR medium revolution lottery table (No. 2) is referred to when the setting is "setting 1", the gaming state is "between non-flags", and the number of touch challenges is the second time.

If you win the "revolution activation", all the results of the touch challenges up to that point will be correct, so the player wants to win the "revolution activation" when the number of "touch challenges" is as large as possible. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 150 and 151, the "revolution activation" is not won in the revolution lottery performed after the "first touch challenge count" and the "second touch challenge count".

FIG. 152 is a diagram showing the configuration of a VR medium revolution lottery table (No. 3). The VR medium revolution lottery table (No. 3) is referred to when the setting is "setting 1", the gaming state is "non-flag", and the number of touch challenges is the third. FIG. 153 is a diagram showing the configuration of the VR medium revolution lottery table (No. 4). The VR medium revolution lottery table (No. 4) is referred to when the setting is "setting 1", the gaming state is "non-flag", and the number of touch challenges is the fourth. FIG. 154 is a diagram showing the configuration of a VR medium revolution lottery table (No. 5). The VR medium revolution lottery table (No. 5) is referred to when the setting is "setting 1", the gaming state is "non-flag", and the number of touch challenges is the fifth.

FIGS. 155 to 159 are diagrams showing the configurations of the VR medium revolution lottery table (No. 6) to the VR medium revolution lottery table (No. 10), respectively. The VR medium revolution lottery table (No. 6) to the VR medium revolution lottery table (No. 10) are set to "setting 6", the game state is "non-flag", and the number of touch challenges is the first. It is referred to when it is the 5th time.

FIG. 160 is a diagram showing the configuration of a VR medium revolution lottery table (No. 11). The VR medium revolution lottery table (No. 11) is referred to when the setting is "all settings", the game state is "when the bonus is established", and the number of touch challenges is the first. FIG. 161 is a diagram showing the configuration of a VR medium revolution lottery table (No. 12). The VR medium revolution lottery table (No. 12) is referred to when the setting is "all settings", the game state is "when the bonus is established", and the number of touch challenges is the second time.

FIG. 162 is a diagram showing the configuration of a VR medium revolution lottery table (No. 13). The VR medium revolution lottery table (No. 13) is referred to when the setting is "all settings", the game state is "when the bonus is established", and the number of touch challenges is the third time. FIG. 163 is a diagram showing the configuration of a VR medium revolution lottery table (No. 14). The VR medium revolution lottery table (No. 14) is referred to when the setting is "all settings", the game state is "when the bonus is established", and the number of touch challenges is the fourth. FIG. 164 is a diagram showing the configuration of a VR medium revolution lottery table (No. 15). The VR medium revolution lottery table (No. 15) is referred to when the setting is "all settings", the game state is "when the bonus is established", and the number of touch challenges is the fifth.

[ART precursor game number lottery table]
Next, various ART precursor game number lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 to 167.

Each ART precursor game number lottery table is referred to when determining the "ART precursor game number" during non-ART or non-bonus. Each ART precursor game number lottery table shows the correspondence between the precursor game number and the lottery value set according to the value of the stock ART type. Here, the "stock ART type" is the type of "ART" to be started next among the winning information of "ART" stored in the sub storage area.

In this embodiment, "D_ART" or "B_ART" is often determined by "first hit of ART". In this case, the lottery value specified in the "D_ART" column and the "B_ART" column in the "stock ART type" is referred to.

The lottery value specified in the "G_ART & R_ART" column in the "Stock ART type" is "D_ART" or / and "B_ART" and "G_ART" or / and "R_ART" depending on the "first hit of ART". It is referred to when winning at the same time. At this time, after the unit game of the number of ART precursor games is digested, the game of "G_ART" or "R_ART" is started at the start of ART (the start game or the first game after the start).

In the ART precursor game number lottery that refers to the ART precursor game number lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is selected as a lottery result. The lottery value specified for each value of is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

FIG. 165 is a diagram showing the configuration of an ART precursor game number lottery table (No. 1). The ART precursor game number lottery table (No. 1) is referred to when the sub-game state is the "general state".

FIG. 166 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ART precursor game number lottery table (No. 2). The ART precursor game number lottery table (No. 2) is referred to when the sub-game state is "CZ (chance zone)".

Further, FIG. 167 is a diagram showing a configuration of an ART precursor game number lottery table (No. 3). The ART precursor game number lottery table (No. 3) is referred to when the sub-game state is "general state" or "CZ (chance zone)" and the game state is "at the end of the bonus".

[Lottery table for the number of precursor games during ART]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 168 to 170, a lottery table for the number of precursor games during various ARTs will be described. The lottery table for the number of precursor games during each ART is referred to when determining the "number of coalesced precursor games" or the "number of VR precursor games" during ART. The lottery table for the number of precursor games during each ART shows the correspondence between the “number of precursor games” and the lottery value set according to the transition to various sub-game states.

In the precursor game number lottery that refers to the precursor game number lottery table during ART, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is selected as a lottery result. The lottery value specified for each value of is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

FIG. 168 is a diagram showing the configuration of a lottery table for the number of precursor games during ART (No. 1). The lottery table for the number of precursor games during ART (No. 1) is when the game state is "when the number of Gs for starting ART is determined", "the number of remaining games for ART is 11G or more (before lever operation)", or "G_ART, R_ART is in progress". Referenced.

FIG. 169 is a diagram showing the configuration of a lottery table for the number of precursor games during ART (No. 2). The lottery table for the number of precursor games during ART (No. 2) is referred to when the game state is "the number of remaining ART games is 7 G or more and 10 G or less (before lever operation)" and "other than during G_ART and R_ART". To.

In addition, FIG. 170 is a diagram showing the configuration of a lottery table for the number of precursor games during ART (No. 3). The number of precursor games during ART lottery table (No. 3) is referred to when the game state is "the number of remaining ART games is 6 G or less (before lever operation)" and "other than during G_ART and R_ART".

[Title lottery table for development production 1]
Next, the title lottery table for development effect 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 171. The title lottery table for development production 1 is referred to when determining the title of "development production 1".

In the "development effect 1" of the present embodiment, a game in which the title of the "development effect 1" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 (hereinafter referred to as "title display game"), and at least once thereafter, a maximum of 6 games. It consists of a directing game that is played continuously over the game. In the present embodiment, the number of games continued after the "title display game" is referred to as the "number of continuous games".

That is, when the "development effect 1" is the shortest, the "number of continuous games" is "1". In this case, one game of the "title display game" and the "number of continuous games" "Development production 1" is executed over two games in which.

The title lottery table for development production 1 shows the correspondence between the value of "Title No." ("1" to "6") corresponding to the type of title and the lottery value set according to various game states. .. In addition, (normal), (luxury) and (luxury fireworks pattern) described in the title column in the title lottery table for development production 1 indicate the display mode (color or pattern) of the title "Bocco" or "Golm". Shown.

In the title lottery that refers to the title lottery table for development effect 1, first, the random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is selected as the value of the lottery result. The lottery value specified for each is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, "F" in the game state "CZ precursor_F_4G" described in the title lottery table for development production 1 means fake. Therefore, for example, when the game state is "CZ precursor_F_4G", it is a "CZ precursor game" in which the "chance zone (CZ)" is not started after the end, and the number of CZ precursor games is "4". Represents. Further, for example, when the game state is "CZ precursor 4G or more", it is a "CZ precursor game" in which the "chance zone (CZ)" is started after the end, and the number of CZ precursor games is "4" or more. Represents the case of.

Then, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 171, if the game state at the time of performing the title lottery referring to the title lottery table for the development effect 1 is, for example, "CZ precursor_F_4G", "Title No." As "1 (Bocco (normal))" is determined with a probability of 28963/32768. Further, for example, if the gaming state is "CZ precursor 4G or more", "1 (Bocco (normal))" is determined as "Title No." with a probability of 27939/32768.

[Production number determination table for development production 1]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 172 and 173, various effect number determination tables for development effect 1 will be described. The effect number determination table for development effect 1 is referred to when determining the "effect number for development effect 1" based on the "scenario No." determined by lottery. The production number determination table for development production 1 is based on the value of "scenario No."("1" to "93") corresponding to the scenario content and the number of continuous games ("1" to "6"). The "production number for development production 1" is specified.

FIG. 172 is a diagram showing the configuration of the effect number determination table (No. 1) for the development effect 1. The production number determination table for development production 1 (No. 1) is referred to when the title for development production 1 is "Bocco", and "development production 1" corresponding to "1" to "44" of "scenario No." The production number for use is specified.

FIG. 173 is a diagram showing the configuration of the effect number determination table (No. 2) for the development effect 1. The production number determination table for development production 1 (No. 2) is referred to when the title for development production 1 is "Bocco", and "development production 1" corresponding to "45" to "93" of "scenario No." The production number for use is specified.

[Production decision table for development production 1]
Next, the effect determination table for the development effect 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 174. The production determination table for development production 1 defines the correspondence between the "production number for development production 1" and the "production name" and "production content". That is, when the "effect number for development effect 1" is determined, the data related to the "effect name" and the "effect content" are uniquely acquired.

For example, when "9" is determined as the "production number for development production 1", "bocco-weak-win" is determined as the "production name", and "lever ON: confrontation-bocco" is determined as the "production content". 1on: Weak avoidance-Bocco, 3on: Stop Bocco, 3off: Win-Bocco, next BET: Go to WIN screen "is decided.

In the production corresponding to "Lever ON: Confrontation-Bocco", the image of the main character "Don-chan" confronting the first character "Bocco" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the start lever 16 is operated. Is displayed. In the production corresponding to "1on: Weak avoidance-Bocco", an image of "Don-chan" avoiding the weak attack of "Bocco" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the stop button is pressed in the first stop operation. ..

In the production corresponding to "3on: Stop Bocco", the liquid crystal display device 11 displays an image in which "Don-chan" makes a final attack on "Bocco" when the stop button is pressed in the third stop operation. In the production corresponding to "3off: Win-Bocco", the image of "Don-chan" winning the battle with "Bocco" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation ends. .. Then, in the effect corresponding to "Next BET: To WIN screen", a video notifying the victory of "Don-chan" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the MAX bet button 14 or the 1BET button 15 is pressed.

[Scenario rewriting lottery table]
Next, various scenario rewriting lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 to 190. Each scenario rewriting lottery table defines the correspondence between the value of "scenario No." and the lottery value set according to the value of "rewriting destination".

In the present embodiment, in "development production 1", first, "title" and "scenario No." are determined. Then, when the start lever 16 is operated in order to start the game in which the "development effect 1" is executed, a scenario rewriting lottery is performed in which the determined "scenario No." is rewritten according to the sub-game state and the like.

In the scenario rewriting lottery that refers to the scenario rewriting lottery table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) are selected for each value of the lottery result. Subtract sequentially at the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

FIG. 175 is a diagram showing the configuration of the scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 1). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 1) is referred to when the continuation game of "Development effect 1" is "1G (game) eye", the sub-game state is "general state", and "other". To. Here, the case of "other" is a case where none of the various scenario rewriting lottery tables described later is selected.

In the present embodiment, when the continuous game of "development effect 1" is the "1Gth", the sub-game state is the "general state", and the sub-game state is "other", as shown in FIG. 175. Since the lottery value of the "rewrite destination" is "0" regardless of the value of the "scenario No.", the "scenario No." is not rewritten. That is, in this case, the "development effect 1" according to the "scenario No." determined before the operation of the start lever 16 is executed.

FIG. 176 is a diagram showing the configuration of the scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 2). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 2) is referred to when the continuous game of "Development effect 1" is "1G", the sub-game state is "general state", and "CZ precursor 4G". .. Here, the case of "CZ precursor 4G" is the case where the value of the CZ precursor counter is "4". That is, when the remaining four games (not including this game) are exhausted, the "CZ (chance zone)" is started.

In the present embodiment, when the continuous game is the "1Gth" and the "CZ precursor 4G", the "scenario No." may be rewritten as shown in FIG. 176. Specifically, when the "scenario No." is the "scenario No. (" 72 "to" 75 ")" where the "bokko" of the "number of continuous games" value "6" loses (recovery of repeated hits-failure) , These "scenario Nos. (" 72 "to" 75 ")" always lose the "bocco" of the value "5" of the "number of continuous games" (recovery of repeated hits-failure) "scenario No. ("68 " "-" 71 ")".

Therefore, when the continuous game is "1G" and "CZ precursor 4G" and "72" to "75" are determined as "scenario No.", the "scenario No." is "scenario No." respectively. It is rewritten as "68" to "71". In this case, "development production 1" ends in the continuation game of "5Gth". In addition, it becomes "CZ precursor 0G" in the continuation game of "5Gth". That is, the end of "development effect 1" and the end of "CZ precursor game" can be coincided with each other.

If the "scenario No. (" 72 "to" 75 ")" is not rewritten, the "development effect 1" ends in the next game after the CZ precursor game ends. Therefore, it becomes impossible to notify that the "CZ (chance zone)" will start at an appropriate timing.

FIG. 177 is a diagram showing the configuration of the scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 3). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 3) is referred to when the continuous game of "Development effect 1" is "1G", the sub-game state is "general state", and "CZ precursor 3G". .. FIG. 178 is a diagram showing the configuration of the scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 4). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 4) is referred to when the continuous game of "development effect 1" is "1G", the sub-game state is "general state", and "CZ precursor 2G". ..

FIG. 179 is a diagram showing the configuration of the scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 5). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 5) is referred to when the continuous game of "development production 1" is "1G", the sub-game state is "general state", and "CZ precursor 1G". .. FIG. 180 is a diagram showing the configuration of a scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 6). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 6) is referred to when the continuous game of "development effect 1" is "1G", the sub-game state is "general state", and "CZ precursor 0G". ..

FIG. 181 is a diagram showing the configuration of a scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 7). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 7) is referred to when the continuation game of "development effect 1" is "1G" and "D, B, G, R_ART precursor 6G". Here, the case of "D, B, G, R_ART precursor 6G" is the case where the value of the ART precursor counter is "6". That is, when the remaining 6 games (not including this game) are exhausted, various "ARTs" are started.

In the present embodiment, when the continuous game of "development effect 1" is "1Gth" and "D, B, G, R_ART precursor 6G", as shown in FIG. 181, "scenario No. Since the lottery value of the "rewrite destination" is "0" regardless of the value of "", the "scenario No." is not rewritten. That is, in this case, the "development effect 1" according to the "scenario No." determined before the operation of the start lever 16 is executed.

FIG. 182 is a diagram showing the configuration of the scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 8). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 8) is referred to when the continuation game of "development effect 1" is "1Gth" and "D, B, G, R_ART precursor 5G".

In the present embodiment, when the continuous game is the "1st G" and the "D, B, G, R_ART precursor 5G", the "scenario No." may be rewritten as shown in FIG. 182. .. For example, when the "scenario No." is the "scenario No. (" 1 "to" 18 ")" in which the "bokko" of the "number of continuous games" values "1" to "5" loses, these "scenarios" No. ("1" to "18") "is always rewritten to" scenario No. ("51" to "54") "in which" Bocco "of the value" 6 "of" number of continuous games "is revived. ..

Therefore, in this case, even if "1" to "18" are determined as the "scenario No.", the "scenario No." is rewritten to any of "51" to "54". , "Development production 1" ends in the continuation game of "6Gth". In addition, it becomes "ART precursor 0G" in the continuation game of "6Gth". That is, in this case, the end of the "development effect 1" and the end of the "ART precursor game" can be coincided with each other.

Also, in this case, "Development production 1" in which "Bocco loses (recovery of repeated hits-failure)" is displayed in the last continuous game, and "Bocco wins (bocco-revival)" in the last continuous game. It is changed to the displayed "Development effect 1". As a result, "ART" will be started from the next game after the end of "Development Production 1" where "Bocco wins (Bocco-revival)" is displayed, causing a sense of discomfort at the start of "ART". You can prevent it from happening.

FIG. 183 is a diagram showing the configuration of the scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 9). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 9) is referred to when the continuation game of "development effect 1" is "1G" and "D, B, G, R_ART precursor 4G". FIG. 184 is a diagram showing the configuration of a scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 10). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 10) is referred to when the continuation game of "development effect 1" is "1G" and "D, B, G, R_ART precursor 3G".

FIG. 185 is a diagram showing the configuration of the scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 11). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 11) is referred to when the continuation game of "development effect 1" is "1G" and "D, B, G, R_ART precursor 2G". FIG. 186 is a diagram showing the configuration of a scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 12). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 12) is referred to when the continuation game of "development effect 1" is "1G" and "D, B, G, R_ART precursor 1G".

FIG. 187 is a diagram showing the configuration of a scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 13). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 13) is referred to when the continuation game of "development effect 1" is "1Gth" and "D, B, G, R_ART precursor 0G".

FIG. 188 is a diagram showing the configuration of a scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 14). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 14) is referred to when the continuation game of "development production 1" is "1Gth" and "main a (reel action, rare role)". Here, in the case of "main a (reel action, rare role)", the reel action (directing using reels 3L, 3C, 3R) and the rare role (small role with a low winning probability) are determined as the internal winning role. It is the case when it is done.

FIG. 189 is a diagram showing the configuration of a scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 15). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 15) is referred to when the continuous game of "development effect 1" is "1Gth" and the game state is "between RB flags". FIG. 190 is a diagram showing the configuration of a scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 16). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 16) is referred to when the continuous game of "development effect 1" is "1Gth" and the game state is "between BB flags".

Although not shown here, in the present embodiment, when the continuous game of "development effect 1" is "2Gth", "3Gth", "4Gth", "5Gth", and "6Gth". A reference scenario rewriting lottery table is also provided separately.

[Title lottery table for development production 2]
Next, the title lottery table for development effect 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 191. The title lottery table for development production 2 is referred to when determining the "title" of "development production 2".

The "development effect 2" of the present embodiment is a game in which the "title" of the "development effect 2" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 ("title display game"), followed by at least one game, and a maximum of seven times. It is composed of a directing game that is continuously performed over the above games. In the present embodiment, the number of games continued after the "title display game" is referred to as the "number of continuous games".

The title lottery table for development production 2 shows the correspondence between the value of "Title No." ("1" to "9") corresponding to the type of title and the lottery value set according to various game states. .. In addition, (normal), (luxury) and (luxury fireworks pattern) described in the title column in the title lottery table for development production 2 are display modes (colors) of the titles "Gorum", "Bocco" or "Norn". And pattern).

In the title lottery that refers to the title lottery table for development effect 2, first, the random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is selected as the value of the lottery result. The lottery value specified for each is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

Then, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 191, if the game state when the title lottery is performed with reference to the title lottery table for development effect 2, for example, "CZ precursor_F_4G", the "title No. "1 (Golm (normal))" is determined with a probability of 23229/32768. Further, for example, if the gaming state is "CZ precursor 4G or more", "1 (Golm (normal))" is determined as "Title No." with a probability of 22205/32768.

[Map lottery table for development production 2]
Next, the map lottery table for development effect 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 and 193. The map lottery table for development effect 2 is referred to when determining the "map No." related to "development effect 2". The map lottery table for development production 2 has the values of "map No."("1" to "60") corresponding to "map contents" and the lottery values set according to the states of various precursors. Show the correspondence.

In the map lottery that refers to the map lottery table for development effect 2, first, the random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is selected as the value of the lottery result. The lottery value specified for each is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

FIG. 192 is a diagram showing a configuration of a map lottery table (No. 1) for development effect 2. Further, FIG. 193 is a diagram showing a configuration of a map lottery table (No. 2) for development effect 2. The map lottery table for development effect 2 (No. 1) and the map lottery table for development effect 2 (No. 2) are referred to when the "title" of "development effect 2" is "gorum (normal)".

For example, when the state when the map lottery is performed with reference to the map lottery table for development effect 2 is "CZ precursor_F_4G", the "map No." is "3 (weak 3G (total 3G))". Is determined with a probability of 9993/32768 (see FIG. 192). Further, for example, when the state at the time of performing the map lottery is "CZ precursor 4G or more", "3 (weak 3G (total 3G))" is determined as "map No." with a probability of 9737/32768. (See FIG. 192).

[Direction lottery table number determination table]
Next, the effect lottery table number determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 194. The effect lottery table number determination table is referred to when determining the "effect lottery table number" based on the "map No." determined by the lottery. The production lottery table number determination table was set according to the value of "map No."("1" to "60") corresponding to the map contents and the number of continuous games ("1" to "7"). "Direction lottery table number" is specified.

The effect lottery table number determination table shown in FIG. 194 is referred to when the "title" of "development effect 2" is "gorum". In this case, as shown in FIG. 194, for example, when the "map No." is "1" and the number of continuous games is "1", "1" is used as the "directing lottery table number". It is determined. Further, for example, when the "map No." is "7" and the number of continuous games is "3", "2" is determined as the "directing lottery table number".

[Direction lottery table]
Next, various effect lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 200. Each effect lottery table is referred to when performing an effect lottery for determining an effect number for development effect 2. Each effect lottery table shows the correspondence between the value of the "effect number for development effect 2" corresponding to the effect content and the lottery value set according to the state of various precursors and the like.

In the production lottery that refers to the production lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is defined for each value of the lottery result. The lottery value is subtracted sequentially. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

FIG. 195 is a diagram showing a configuration of an effect lottery table (No. 1) for table number 1. Further, FIG. 196 is a diagram showing a configuration of an effect lottery table (No. 2) for table number 1. When referring to these production lottery tables for table number 1, for example, when the states of various precursors are "CZ precursor 4G" (see FIG. 195), "the production number for development production 2" is ". 13 (VS Gorum-Gorum Small Attack-Loss) ”has a chance of winning 4096/3276.

FIG. 197 is a diagram showing a configuration of an effect lottery table (No. 1) for table number 2. Further, FIG. 198 is a diagram showing a configuration of an effect lottery table (No. 2) for table number 2. When referring to these effect lottery tables for table number 2, for example, when the state of various precursors is "CZ precursor 4G" (see FIG. 197), "the effect number for development effect 2" is ". 148 (Viking Battle> VS Gorum-Golm Small Attack-Loss-2G) ”has a chance of winning 4096/3276.

FIG. 199 is a diagram showing a configuration of an effect lottery table (No. 1) for table number 24. Further, FIG. 200 is a diagram showing a configuration of an effect lottery table (No. 2) for table number 24. When referring to these production lottery tables for table number 24, for example, when the state of various precursors is "CZ precursor 4G" (see FIG. 199), "the production number for development production 2" is ". 54 (Viking Battle> Resurrection of repeated hits-Failure) ”will definitely win.

[Map rewriting lottery table]
Next, various map rewriting lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 2001 to 216. Each map rewrite lottery table defines the correspondence between the "map No." and the lottery value set according to the "rewrite destination".

In the present embodiment, in "development production 2", first, "title" and "map No." are determined. Then, in order to start the game in the "development effect 2", when the start lever 16 is operated, a map rewriting lottery is performed in which the determined "map No." is rewritten according to various precursor states and the like.

In the map rewriting lottery that refers to the map rewriting lottery table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) are selected for each value of the lottery result. Subtract sequentially at the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

FIG. 201 is a diagram showing the configuration of a map rewriting lottery table (No. 1). The map rewriting lottery table (No. 1) is referred to when the continuation game of "Development production 2" is "1G (game)", the sub-game state is "general state", and the sub-game state is "other". To. Here, the case of "other" is a case where none of the various map rewriting lottery tables described later is selected.

When the continuous game of "development effect 2" is "1G", the sub-game state is "general state", and the sub-game state is "other", as shown in FIG. 201, "map No." Since the lottery value of the "rewrite destination" is "0" regardless of the value of, the "map No." is not rewritten. That is, in this case, the "development effect 2" according to the "map No." determined before the operation of the start lever 16 is executed.

FIG. 202 is a diagram showing the configuration of a map rewriting lottery table (No. 2). The map rewriting lottery table (No. 2) is referred to when the continuation game of "Development production 2" is "1G", the sub-game state is "general state", and "CZ precursor 4G". .. Here, the case of "CZ precursor 4G" is a case where the value of the CZ precursor counter is "4". That is, when the remaining four games (not including this game) are exhausted, the "CZ (chance zone)" is started.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 202, when the continuous game is the "1Gth" and the "CZ precursor 4G", the "map No." may be rewritten. Specifically, the "map No." is the "map No." (12, 18, 21, 24, 54, 56, 57, 59, 60) having the value "6" or "7" of the "number of continuous games". , These "map numbers" are rewritten to "map numbers (11, 17, 20, 23, 53, 55, 58)" of the value "5" of the "number of continuous games".

Therefore, when the continuous game is the "1Gth" and the "CZ precursor 4G", the "map No." is "12", "18", "21", "24", "54", When "56", "57", "59", and "60" have been determined, the "map numbers" are "11", "17", "20", "23", "53", respectively. It is rewritten as "55", "55", "58", and "58". In this case, "development production 2" ends in the continuation game of "5Gth". In addition, it becomes "CZ precursor 0G" in the continuation game of "5Gth". That is, the end of the "development effect 2" and the end of the "CZ precursor game" can be matched.

When "12", "18", "21", "24", "54", "56", "57", "59", "60" are determined as the "map No." , If the "map No." is not rewritten, the "development effect 2" will end in the next game after the CZ precursor game has ended. Therefore, it becomes impossible to notify that the "CZ (chance zone)" will start at an appropriate timing.

FIG. 203 is a diagram showing the configuration of a map rewriting lottery table (No. 3). The map rewriting lottery table (No. 3) is referred to when the continuation game of "Development production 2" is "1G", the sub-game state is "general state", and "CZ precursor 3G". .. FIG. 204 is a diagram showing the configuration of a map rewriting lottery table (No. 4). The map rewriting lottery table (4) is referred to when the continuation game of "development production 2" is "1G", the sub-game state is "general state", and "CZ precursor 2G". ..

FIG. 205 is a diagram showing the configuration of a map rewriting lottery table (No. 5). The map rewriting lottery table (No. 5) is referred to when the continuous game of "development effect 2" is "1G", the sub-game state is "general state", and "CZ precursor 1G". .. FIG. 206 is a diagram showing the configuration of a map rewriting lottery table (No. 6). The map rewriting lottery table (No. 6) is referred to when the continuation game of "development production 2" is "1G", the sub-game state is "general state", and "CZ precursor 0G". ..

FIG. 207 is a diagram showing the configuration of a map rewriting lottery table (No. 7). The map rewriting lottery table (No. 7) is referred to when the continuation game of "development production 2" is "1G" and "D, B, G, R_ART precursor 6G". Here, the case of "D, B, G, R_ART precursor 6G" is a case where the value of the ART precursor counter is "6". That is, when the remaining 6 games (not including this game) are exhausted, various "ARTs" are started.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 207, when the continuous game of "development effect 2" is "1G" and "D, B, G, R_ART precursor 6G", "map No. May be rewritten. For example, when the "map No." is "1" to "24" and "49" to "60", these "map No." are rewritten to "48".

Therefore, when the continuation game of "development production 2" is "1G" and "D, B, G, R_ART precursor 6G", "map No." is "1" to "24", " When "49" to "60" have been determined, these "map numbers" are rewritten to "48" and the number of continuous games becomes "7". As a result, "development production 2" is completed in the continuation game of "7th G", and the state becomes "ART precursor 0G". That is, the end of "development effect 2" and the end of "ART precursor game" can be coincided with each other.

FIG. 208 is a diagram showing the configuration of a map rewriting lottery table (No. 8). The map rewriting lottery table (No. 8) is referred to when the continuation game of "development production 2" is "1G" and "D, B, G, R_ART precursor 5G". FIG. 209 is a diagram showing the configuration of a map rewriting lottery table (No. 9). The map rewriting lottery table (No. 9) is referred to when the continuation game of "development production 2" is "1G" and "D, B, G, R_ART precursor 4G".

FIG. 210 is a diagram showing the configuration of a map rewriting lottery table (No. 10). The map rewriting lottery table (No. 10) is referred to when the continuation game of "Development production 2" is "1G" and "D, B, G, R_ART precursor 3G". FIG. 211 is a diagram showing the configuration of a map rewriting lottery table (No. 11). The map rewriting lottery table (No. 11) is referred to when the continuation game of "development production 2" is "1G" and "D, B, G, R_ART precursor 2G".

FIG. 212 is a diagram showing the configuration of a map rewriting lottery table (No. 12). The map rewriting lottery table (No. 12) is referred to when the continuation game of "development effect 2" is "1G" and "D, B, G, R_ART precursor 1G". FIG. 213 is a diagram showing the configuration of a map rewriting lottery table (No. 13). The map rewriting lottery table (No. 13) is referred to when the continuation game of "Development effect 2" is "1G" and "D, B, G, R_ART precursor 0G".

FIG. 214 is a diagram showing the configuration of a map rewriting lottery table (No. 14). The map rewriting lottery table (No. 14) is referred to when the continuation game of "development production 2" is "1G" and "main a (reel action, rare role)". Here, in the case of "main a (reel action, rare role)", the reel action (directing using reels 3L, 3C, 3R) and the rare role (small role with a low winning probability) are determined as the internal winning role. It is the case when it is done.

FIG. 215 is a diagram showing the configuration of a map rewriting lottery table (No. 15). The map rewriting lottery table (No. 15) is referred to when the continuous game of "development effect 2" is "1Gth" and the game state is "between RB flags". FIG. 216 is a diagram showing the configuration of a map rewriting lottery table (No. 16). The map rewriting lottery table (No. 16) is referred to when the continuous game of "development effect 2" is "1Gth" and the game state is "between BB flags".

Although not shown here, in the present embodiment, the continuation game of "development production 2" is "2Gth", "3Gth", "4Gth", "5Gth", "6Gth" and "7Gth". A map rewriting lottery table to be referred to in the case of "" is also provided separately.

[Production rewriting condition table]
Next, the effect rewriting condition table will be described with reference to FIG. 217. The production rewriting condition table shows the end of the development production set according to the "production number for development production 1" and the "production number for development production 2" and the value of the lottery flag K ("0" to "4"). It is stipulated in the correspondence relationship of.

The "○" mark in the production rewriting condition table indicates "development production 1" in which the corresponding "development production 1 production number" has been determined, or "development production 2" in which the "development production 2 production number" has been determined. Indicates the end.

The productions corresponding to "18" of "Production number for development production 1" and "54", "55", and "25" of "Production number for development production 2" are the main characters of the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment. It is a production that "Don-chan" is revived. Then, in the game before "Don-chan" is revived, the result of the battle (win or lose) is once derived (displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11).

That is, in the game before "Don-chan" is revived, in order to make it appear that the battle (development production) is over, the development production is contrary to the originally determined production of "scenario No." and "map No.". To end. At this time, the player can determine whether it was a development production without the revival of "Don-chan" or a development production that was originally planned to revive "Don-chan" but was forcibly terminated. Since it is not possible, the player does not feel uncomfortable even if such a production is performed.

In the production corresponding to "54" of the "production number for development production 2", "Don-chan" is revived, but a display is displayed to notify the loss (failure). That is, the effect corresponding to "54" of the "development effect 2 effect number" is merely an additional effect to arouse the expectation of the player, and is not always necessary.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when there is no problem even if the development production (continuous production) is forcibly terminated, for example, a rare role with a high expectation of winning an "ART" or a "bonus" is won. , Cancel the development production (continuous production) that was planned to be executed. Then, the production when the development production is not performed is determined by lottery and executed.

In addition, when there is no problem even if the development effect (continuous effect) is forcibly terminated, if a reel action or freeze (game lock) that does not match the time to be executed in the normal effect occurs, it will be executed. The development production (continuous production) that was was canceled. Then, the production when the development production is not performed is determined by lottery and executed.

In addition, in the production corresponding to "18" of "Production number for development production 1" and "55" and "25" of "Production number for development production 2", "Don-chan" is revived and wins (success). Is displayed. Then, the display notifying the win (success) announces the winning of "ART" (may be the winning of bonus).

Therefore, if the development production (continuous production) is forcibly terminated, the winning of "ART" will not be announced. Therefore, the procedure of starting "ART" after the notification of winning of "ART" is performed. It will not be possible to carry out. As a result, the playability may become unclear, or the production that arouses a sense of expectation may become meaningless.

Therefore, in the production corresponding to "18" of "Production number for development production 1" and "55" and "25" of "Production number for development production 2", "54" of "Production number for development production 2" It is not preferable to forcibly end the production, unlike the production corresponding to. However, when a freeze (game lock) occurs, the winning of "ART" is confirmed, and the freeze itself corresponds to the notification of winning of "ART".

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a freeze occurs (that is, in the production corresponding to "18" of the "development effect 1 effect number" and "55" and "25" of the "development effect 2 effect number" (that is,). Only when the winning of "ART" is confirmed and the player can recognize that fact), the development production (continuous production) is forcibly terminated. Then, the production based on the "freeze" is determined by lottery and executed.

<Structure of storage area provided in sub RAM>
[Sub storage area]
Next, the configuration of the sub storage area provided in the sub RAM 83 will be described with reference to FIG. 218. Although description is omitted here (not shown), the sub-RAM 83 includes a storage area for registering the various effect contents and effect numbers described above, and an internal transmission from the main control circuit 41 (see FIG. 4). A storage area for storing various data such as winning combinations is also provided.

The sub storage area has an "ART stock area A", an "ART stock area B", a "G_ART stock area", and a "rocket flag storage area". The "ART stock area A" shows a specific example of the notification storage area according to the present invention, and the "ART stock area B" shows a specific example of the non-notification storage area according to the present invention.

In the "ART stock area A", the winning information of "D_ART" or "B_ART" scheduled to display (notify) the winning is stored. 256 winning information can be stored in this "ART stock area A". Further, in the "ART stock area B", the winning information of "D_ART" or "B_ART" scheduled to hide (not notify) the winning is stored. 256 winning information can be stored in this "ART stock area B".

The winning information of "ART" stored in "ART stock area A" or "ART stock area B" is the identification data of "ART" ("0" to "2") and the identification of the table number of the stock trigger. Data (“0” to “9”) is included. When the winning "ART" is "B_ART", the identification data of "ART" is "1", and when the winning "ART" is "D_ART", the identification data of "ART" is It becomes "2". The table number of the stock trigger is determined with reference to the various table number determination tables described above (see FIGS. 91, 97, 122, 131, 138, 141).

In the present embodiment, the execution is preferentially executed from the "ART" corresponding to the winning information of the "ART" stored in the "ART stock area A". Then, when all the "ART" corresponding to the winning information of the "ART" stored in the "ART stock area A" is executed, it corresponds to the winning information of the "ART" stored in the "ART stock area B". It is executed in the order in which "ART" is stored.

That is, in the present embodiment, the "ART" notified of the winning is preferentially executed, and then the "ART" not notified of the winning is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent it from being able to easily guess the timing and the trigger at which the winning of the "ART" for which the winning was not notified is determined. Further, in this case, after all the "ART" notified that the winning has been won is executed, the player has a feeling of expectation as to whether or not the "ART" is executed next each time the "ART" is completed. You can have a game and enhance the interest of the game.

The winning information of "G_ART" is stored in the "G_stock area". 64 pieces of winning information can be stored in this "G_ART stock area". The winning information of "G_ART" includes identification data ("0" to "9") of the table number of the stock trigger and ART mode ("0" to "3") at the time of stock. When "R_ART" is won, "1" is stored in the "rocket flag storage area".

Further, the sub storage area has a "VR stock counter", a "continuous stock counter", a "CZ precursor counter", an "ART precursor counter", a "coalescence precursor counter", a "rocket precursor counter" and a "VR precursor counter". ..

The value of the "VR stock counter" is added by "1" each time the "Viking Rush (VR)" is won, and is subtracted by "1" when "VR" is started. The value of the "continuous stock counter" is added by "1" each time the continuous stock is won during "D_ART", and is subtracted by "1" each time "D_ART" is continued.

The "CZ precursor game number" is set in the "CZ precursor counter", and the value of the "CZ precursor counter" is subtracted by "1" each time the CZ precursor game is digested. The "ART precursor game number" is set in the "ART precursor counter", and the value of the "ART precursor counter" is subtracted by "1" each time the ART precursor game is exhausted.

The "combination precursor game number" is set in the "combination precursor counter", and the value of the "combination precursor counter" is subtracted by "1" each time the coalescence precursor game is digested. The "rocket precursor counter" is set to the "number of rocket precursor games", and the value of the "rocket precursor counter" is subtracted by "1" each time the rocket precursor game is exhausted. The "VR precursor game number" is set in the "VR precursor counter", and the value of the "VR precursor counter" is subtracted by "1" each time the VR precursor game is consumed.

Further, the sub storage area has an "ART mode" storage area, a "loop mode" storage area, a "coalescence mode" storage area, a "next latent management flag" storage area, and an "ART identification data" storage area.

The "ART mode" is provided in "B_ART" and "D_ART", and is a mode related to the lottery (winning probability) of "G_ART". The "loop mode" is a mode related to the lottery (winning probability) of continuous stock in "D_ART". The "combination mode" is a mode related to the ART lottery (winning probability) in "G_ART".

The "next latent management flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the precursor game is used between the "ARTs". The "ART identification data" is data for distinguishing between "B_ART" and "D_ART". If the currently activated "ART" is "B_ART", the "ART identification data" will be "1", and if it is "D_ART", the "ART identification data" will be "2". ..

Further, the sub storage area includes an "ART game number counter", a "combined game number counter", a "combined identification data" storage area, a "rocket identification data" storage area, and a "VR identification data" storage area.

The "ART game number counter" is provided to manage the number of remaining games of "B_ART" and "D_ART". The "ART start G number" is set in this "ART game number counter". Then, the value of the "ART game number counter" is subtracted by "1" each time the game in "B_ART" or "D_ART" is digested.

The "combined game number counter" is provided to manage the number of remaining games of "G_ART". For example, the "number of combined games" is set in this "counted number of combined games". Then, the value of the "combined game number counter" is subtracted by "1" each time the game in "G_ART" is digested.

The "combination identification data" is data for identifying "G_ART", and when the currently activated "ART" is "G_ART", the value of the "combination identification data" is set to "1". Become. The "rocket identification data" is data for identifying "R_ART", and when the currently activated "ART" is "R_ART", the value of the "rocket identification data" is set to "1". Become. The "VR identification data" is data for identifying "VR", and when "VR (Viking Rush)" is activated, the value of "VR identification data" becomes "1".

Further, the sub storage areas include a "touch operation identification data" storage area, a "VR medium revolution flag" storage area, a "CZ game number counter", a "CZ identification data" storage area, a "touch compatible data" storage area, and a "VR". It has a "middle / right / wrong identification flag" storage area.

The "touch operation identification data" is data for identifying the touch operation for the left character decoration unit 22L and the right character decoration unit 22R. When a touch operation is performed on the left character decoration unit 22L, the value of the "touch operation identification data" becomes "1". Further, when a touch operation is performed on the right character decoration unit 22R, the value of the "touch operation identification data" becomes "2".

The "VR medium revolution flag" is a flag for managing whether or not a "revolution is activated" is won. When the "revolution is activated" is won, "1" is stored in the "VR medium revolution flag" storage area.

The "CZ game number counter" is provided to manage the number of remaining games in the "CZ (chance zone)". The "CZ game number" is set in this "CZ game number counter". Then, the value of the "CZ game number counter" is subtracted by "1" each time the game in the "CZ (chance zone)" is digested. The "CZ identification data" is data for managing whether or not it is in the "CZ (chance zone)", and when it is in the "CZ (chance zone)", the value of the "CZ identification data" is It becomes "1".

The "touch-compatible data" is data that identifies the contents of correct / incorrect answers (touch-compatible) in the "Viking Rush (VR)". For example, when the correct answer is that the touch to the right character decoration unit 22R is correct and there is no touch to the left character decoration unit 22L and the right character decoration unit 22R, the value of the "touch-compatible data" is "0". become. The "VR medium correctness identification flag" is data for identifying the correctness of the five touch challenges in "VR".

[Correspondence table between table numbers and various states]
Next, the correspondence between the table numbers and various states will be described with reference to FIG. 219. FIG. 219 shows a correspondence table between the table numbers and various states.

For example, the value "0" of the "table number" indicates that the state is "general state" or "CZ (chance zone)". Therefore, when "0" is stored as the value of the "table number" in various ART stock areas, it indicates that the "ART" has won in the "general state" or the "CZ (chance zone)".

[Correspondence table between loop mode data and loop mode]
Next, the correspondence between the loop mode data and the loop mode will be described with reference to FIG. 220. FIG. 220 is a correspondence table between the loop mode data and the loop mode, and shows various loop modes according to the loop mode data.

For example, when the value of "loop mode data" is "1", it indicates that "loop mode 1" is set. When "loop mode 1" is set in "D_ART", the result of continuous stock lottery performed for each game until the game (game) related to one set of "D_ART" is digested. , 33% chance to win the continuous stock.

<Fraud detection function and countermeasure function>
The pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes various detection functions of fraudulent acts (goto acts) and various regulation functions (countermeasure functions) of games performed when fraudulent acts are detected. Hereinafter, the fraud detection method and the countermeasure method provided in the pachislot machine 1 will be described.

[Detection method and countermeasure method for fraudulent activity during ART]
As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of ART states (specific game states) are provided as sub-game states. Since it is expected that benefits (addition and continuation of ART) will be obtained during the operation period of these ARTs, the operation period of the ART is likely to be a target period of fraudulent activity. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the presence or absence of fraudulent activity is detected in the processing during ART, and when the fraudulent activity is detected, a predetermined game regulation process is performed.

In this embodiment, various errors (command errors) occur in the command data received by the sub CPU 81 as described in the main board communication task (see FIG. 244 described later) and the reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 265 described later) described later. Determine if there is. Specifically, whether or not the received command data has a physical layer error, whether or not the command data has a thumb error (BCC (Block Check Character) error), and whether or not the command type has a valid range ("01H" to "" It is determined whether or not it is within 10H ”) and whether or not the command reception order (command sequence) is normal, and the presence or absence of a command error is determined.

The parameters for determining the presence or absence of a command error are not limited to these parameters, and any parameter can be used as long as the parameter can determine an error in the command data. For example, it may be determined whether or not the command data size (8 bytes) is normal, whether or not the command data reception interval (6 msec) is normal, and the presence or absence of a command error. ..

Then, in the present embodiment, when the occurrence of a command error is detected during the ART game, it is determined that some kind of fraudulent act has been performed during the ART game, and the following game regulation process is performed.

First, the game regulation process to be performed when a command error occurs during "Viking Rush (VR)" will be described. Since "VR" is a game period in which the most profit can be expected (addition of ART), there is a high possibility that cheating will be performed during the operation period of "VR". Moreover, since the probability of occurrence of "VR" is lower than that of other ARTs, it is highly possible that the cause of the command error occurrence in "VR" is fraudulent activity.

Therefore, if a command error occurs during "VR", the number of ART games and sets stocked up to that point (the number of unit games currently remaining in the specific game state), and the command error occurs. A process is performed to clear (set to "0") the number of ART games and the number of sets to be added later. That is, when a command error occurs during "VR", the occurrence of ART itself is suppressed.

Next, the game regulation process to be performed when a command error occurs during ART other than "VR" will be described. Since the probability of occurrence of ART other than "VR" is higher than that of "VR", a command error may occur not only due to fraudulent acts (goto acts) but also due to natural noise or the like.

Therefore, if a command error occurs during an ART other than "VR", the number of ART games and the number of sets that were in stock by the time the command error occurred, taking into consideration the possibility of the command error occurring naturally. Guarantees and clears only the number of ART games and sets added after a command error occurs.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the content of the game regulation process (ART generation suppression process) is changed according to the type of ART that is operating when a command error occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to detect and suppress fraudulent acts (goto acts) during ART without taking excessive measures, and loss of both the amusement shop and the player. Can be suppressed as much as possible.

The ART generation suppression process for the above-mentioned fraudulent activity during ART is performed by the ART process (see FIG. 250 described later) and the start command reception fraud process (see FIG. 252 described later) described later.

[Detection method and countermeasure method for fraudulent activity against alternative production]
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, an alternative effect (touch challenge) performed during "VR (Viking Rush)" or when the VR is locked is performed. Then, when the player touches (selects) one of the left character decoration unit 22L and the right character decoration unit 22R and answers correctly, the player is sure to add a predetermined privilege (addition of the number of ART games or activate "VR"). ) Is given. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the alternative production will also be the target of fraudulent acts (goto acts).

For example, during the alternative production, the correct answer (correct answer (touch success) / incorrect answer (touch failure)) of the touch operation is forcibly rewritten by some kind of fraudulent act (goto act), and the correct answer is forged. There may be cases where the benefits are unfairly obtained. However, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function of detecting fraudulent acts against such alternative effects, and when the fraudulent acts are detected, a process of canceling the privilege grant is performed.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, first, the result of the billy touch correct answer / incorrect answer lottery process determined when the start command is received (when the start lever 16 is operated) (touch correspondence: correct answer content or non-touch operation). Based on the correct answer content) and the result of the touch operation actually executed by the player (touch result), the correctness judgment (correct answer / incorrect answer) of the touch challenge is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not the correctness determination result (correct answer / incorrect answer) information matches the correctness information of the touch challenge displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Then, when the two do not match, it is determined that some kind of fraudulent act has been performed on the alternative production, and the information of the correctness judgment result of the touch challenge is rewritten as "incorrect answer (touch failure)". As a result, the addition of the number of ART games or the granting of the privilege of activating "VR" is canceled, so that cheating can be suppressed.

In the above-mentioned process of rewriting the information on the correct / incorrect result of the touch challenge, the correct / incorrect result used in the privilege grant determination process (internal process) is rewritten as "incorrect answer", but is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. The correctness information of the touch challenge is not rewritten. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that some kind of fraudulent act has been performed on the alternative effect, even if "correct answer (touch success)" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, ART The number of games will not be added or the privilege of activating "VR" will not be given.

The ART generation suppression process (game regulation process) for fraudulent acts during the above-mentioned alternative production is performed by the billy touch correctness determination process (see FIG. 259 described later) described later.

[Detection method and countermeasure method for cheating during bonus games]
(1) Fraud detection method and countermeasure method based on the number of bonus games As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, an ART lottery is performed during a bonus game (“BB”), and a predetermined ART win is obtained. May be determined (see FIGS. 136 and 137). In this case, the winning ART information (winning information) is stored in the ART stock area of the sub RAM 83, and the stocked ART operates after the current bonus game is completed.

However, during the bonus game, if a fraudulent act such as clearing the sub RAM 83 (hereinafter referred to as RAM clear goto) is performed and a received command is missed (communication error), the bonus game If ART is stocked at the end (forced termination), the stocked ART will be activated after the bonus game ends. That is, in this case, the privilege is given even though the cheating is performed during the bonus game.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the presence or absence of such fraudulent activity is detected by checking whether or not the bonus game has ended normally, and when it is determined that the fraudulent activity has been performed, the ART operation is started. Clear the condition data (trigger condition data). Specifically, when the number of games digested during the bonus game (hereinafter referred to as the number of bonus games) is less than the minimum number of games that can be digested during the bonus operation period, for example, cheating such as RAM clear goto. Judges that it was performed during the bonus game, and clears the data of the ART operation start condition.

For example, in this embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out that triggers the end of the bonus of "BB1" (special game) is 263 (see FIG. 12), which is the maximum number of medals to be paid out in one game in "BB1". Since the number of cards is 12, the game is played at least 22 times or more during the operation period of "BB1". That is, the number of bonus games at the end of "BB1" will not be less than 22 times.

If the number of bonus games (value of the bonus game counter described later) at the end of "BB1" is less than 22 (21 or less), the command is missed due to some fraudulent activity during "BB1" (reception error). ) May occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the number of bonus games at the end of "BB1" is less than 22 times (21 times or less), it is determined that some kind of cheating (RAM clear goto, etc.) has been performed, and the ART stock area. Data (winning information) and the value of the ART game number counter are cleared. As a result, if any fraudulent activity is performed during "BB1", the occurrence of ART can be suppressed.

The ART generation suppression process (game regulation process) for fraudulent acts during the bonus game described above is performed by the bonus end command reception process (see FIG. 262 described later) described later.

(2) Method for suppressing fraudulent activity by controlling the on / off of the "bonus completion flag" In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the condition of "bonus completion" is satisfied at the end of "BB1" or "BB3". In that case, a predetermined ART is always won by the ART lottery performed in the game at the end of the bonus (see, for example, FIG. 139). That is, if the condition of "when the bonus is completed" is satisfied at the end of "BB1" or "BB3", the operation of the predetermined ART is confirmed.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the game of "BB3" (Billy Bonus), the symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination in which the payout of medals is "1" is performed 15 times on the effective line. When the game of "BB3" is completed, the condition of "when the bonus is completed" is satisfied, and the privilege of activating ART is given after the end of "BB3". Further, in the present embodiment, in the game of "BB1", "C_BB medium control combination 1" to "C_BB medium control combination 6" (the number of medals paid out is 11) is not internally won. Even when the game of "BB1" is completed, the condition of "when the bonus is completed" is satisfied, and the privilege of activating ART is given after the end of "BB1".

In the game of "BB1", if any of "C_BB medium control combination 1" to "C_BB medium control combination 6" (the number of medals paid out is 11) is internally won, the winning in FIG. 54 As explained in the correspondence table between the winning combination and the stop order, the push order instruction of the reverse push (the push order of "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left") is notified ("reverse push navigation" is displayed). .. That is, if the game of "BB1" is completed without displaying "reverse push navigation" even once during the game period of "BB1", the condition of "at the time of completing the bonus" is satisfied and "BB1" is satisfied. After the end, the privilege of activating ART will be given.

The pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment also has a function of taking measures against fraudulent acts (for example, RAM clearing goto) against such a privilege granting operation. In this countermeasure function, a specific flag (hereinafter, referred to as “bonus completion flag”) for controlling whether or not to activate ART when the condition of “bonus completion” is satisfied is provided in the sub RAM 83. Then, the "bonus completion flag" (specific game activation control information) is controlled to be turned on / off to control the activation / non-activation of ART after the end of "BB1" or "BB3".

Specifically, if the "bonus completion flag" is on when the "BB1" or "BB3" game is completed by satisfying the "bonus completion" condition, the ART is activated after the bonus is completed. To be started. However, even if the condition of "bonus completion" is satisfied at the end of "BB1" or "BB3", ART does not operate when the "bonus completion flag" is off.

In order to realize this countermeasure function, in the present embodiment, first, at the start of the game of "BB1" or "BB3" (see the processing at the time of receiving the bonus start command in FIG. 261 described later), the "bonus completion flag" is set. Turn it on. Next, during the bonus game, it is determined for each game whether or not the above-mentioned "at the time of completing the bonus" is established. Then, when the above-mentioned "bonus completion time" condition is no longer satisfied during the bonus game, the "bonus completion time flag" is turned off (see the bonus processing in FIG. 260 described later). In this case, ART will not operate after the bonus ends. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned "bonus completion time" condition is satisfied by normal game operation until the end of the bonus, the on state of the "bonus completion time flag" is maintained until the end of the bonus. The operation of ART is started.

Then, in the above-mentioned ART activation control method, if a fraudulent act such as RAM clearing is performed during the bonus game, the "bonus completion flag" is cleared (turned off). In this case, due to cheating, even if the above-mentioned "at the end of the bonus" condition is satisfied at the end of the bonus, ART will not operate after the end of the bonus.

That is, in the above-mentioned method of suppressing fraudulent activity by controlling the on / off of the "bonus completion flag", since ART non-activation is determined at the same time as the fraudulent activity occurs, the fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Further, in this method, for example, at the end of the bonus (after the occurrence of fraudulent activity), it is not necessary to separately perform special processing for clearing the ART activation condition data, etc., so that the occurrence of ART is suppressed by a simpler method. can do.

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 221 to 243, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 51 of the main control circuit 41 by using the program will be described.

[Main pachislot operation processing controlled by the main CPU]
First, the procedure of the main operation processing of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 51 will be described with reference to the main flowchart (hereinafter referred to as the main flow) shown in FIG. 221.

First, when the power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process at the time of turning on the power (S1). In this initialization process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, whether the settings have been changed appropriately, and the like, and the initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 53 is cleared. The designated storage area referred to here is a storage area such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area that requires data to be erased for each unit game (game).

Next, the main CPU 51 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor 35S and the start switch 16S is checked. The details of the medal reception / start check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 222 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 extracts a random number value (0 to 65535) and stores the extracted random number value in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53 (S4). Next, the main CPU 51 extracts various effect random values used for the lottery process of the type of "game lock", and the extracted effect random values are stored in the effect random value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53. Store in (S5). Specifically, in the present embodiment, in S5, at least two types of effect random values (the effect random value 1 and the effect random value 2 described later) are extracted. In this embodiment, each effect random value is extracted from the range of 0 to 65535.

Then, when the extracted various random number values are stored in the predetermined random number value storage area, the main CPU 51 performs an internal lottery process (S6). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random number value extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 223 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a game lock lottery process (S7). The details of the game lock lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 225 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop initial setting process (S8). The details of the reel stop initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 226 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a start command transmission process (S9). Specifically, the main CPU 51 transmits a start command to the sub control circuit 42. The start command is configured to include parameters for specifying an internal winning combination and the like.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a lock process at the start of the game (S10). In this process, the lock (reel effect) at the start of the game corresponding to the type of "game lock" determined in the process of S7 is mainly performed. The details of the lock process at the start of the game will be described later with reference to FIG. 227 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs weight processing (S11). In this process, if a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has not elapsed since the start of the previous game, the main CPU 51 consumes the waiting time until the predetermined time elapses.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel rotation start process (S12). In this process, the main CPU 51 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, the drive of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R is controlled by the interrupt process (see FIG. 243), which is executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). Then, the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is accelerated and controlled until its rotational speed reaches a constant speed, and then is controlled so that the constant speed is maintained.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S13). In this process, the main CPU 51 acquires the attraction priority data and stores it in the attraction priority data storage area. The details of the pull-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 228 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop control process (S14). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing at which the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are pressed and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 231 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a winning search process (S15). In this process, the main CPU 51 stores the data of the symbol code storage area (symbol code storage area 2 and later in FIG. 50) in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 46). Further, in this process, the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line (winning determination line) after all the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R are stopped, and the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 7 to 11). To collate. Then, the main CPU 51 may determine whether or not the display combination is displayed on the effective line, and store the determination result in the display combination storage area.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a medal payout process (S16). In this process, the hopper 33 is driven and the number of credits is updated based on the number of payouts of the display combination determined in S15, and the medals are paid out. At this time, in the present embodiment, as shown in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 7 to 11), the number of medals inserted is one or three, and the number of medals paid out varies depending on the display combination. The maximum number of payouts (upper limit of payout) is 15.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs RT control processing (S17). In this process, the main CPU 51 manages the RT game state. The details of the RT control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 239 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs the effect control process at the end of the game (S18). In this process, the output of the jackpot signal is controlled according to a predetermined condition. The details of the effect control process at the end of the game will be described later with reference to FIG. 240 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a payout end command transmission process (S19). Specifically, the main CPU 51 transmits a payout end command to the sub control circuit 42.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus end check process (S20). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to various counters for managing the end timing of the bonus game, and checks whether or not to end the operation of the bonus game. The details of the bonus end check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 241 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus operation check process (S21). In this process, the main CPU 51 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus game and whether or not to perform the replay. The details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 242 described later. When the bonus operation check process is completed, the main CPU 51 returns the process to S2 and repeats the processes after S2.

[Medal reception / start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 222, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S3 in the main flow (see FIG. 221) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not there is an automatic closing request (S31). The presence / absence of the automatic closing request is determined by determining whether or not the automatic closing counter is "0". That is, when the automatic closing counter is "0", the main CPU 51 determines that there is no automatic closing request, and when the automatic closing counter is "1" or more, it determines that there is an automatic closing request.

The automatic input counter is data for identifying whether or not the display combination related to the replay is established in the previous unit game. When the display combination related to the re-game is established, the number of medals inserted in the previous unit game is automatically inserted into the automatic insertion counter.

In S31, when the main CPU 51 determines that there is an automatic closing request (when the determination in S31 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the automatic closing process (S32). In this process, the value of the automatic input counter is copied to the input number counter, and then the value of the automatic input counter is cleared. After that, the main CPU 51 performs the process of S39 described later.

On the other hand, in S31, when the main CPU 51 determines that there is no automatic insertion request (when the determination in S31 is NO), the main CPU 51 permits the medal acceptance (S33). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 35 (see FIG. 3) is driven, and medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 13 are accepted. The accepted medals are counted and then guided to the hopper 33.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the maximum value of the number of inserted sheets according to the gaming state (S34). Specifically, in the BB3 (RB3) gaming state, the maximum value of the number of inserted sheets is set to "1", and in the other gaming states (BB1, BB2 gaming state and general gaming state), the maximum value of the number of inserted sheets is set to "3". Set to.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the medal acceptance is permitted (S35). When it is determined in S35 that the main CPU 51 is not permitted to accept medals (when the determination in S35 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S39 described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S35 that the main CPU 51 is permitted to accept medals (when the determination in S35 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a medal insertion check process (S36). In this process, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the medals have been inserted, and adds "1" to the inserted number counter when the medals are inserted.

Next, the main CPU 51 transmits a medal insertion command to the sub control circuit 42 (S37). The medal insertion command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of inserted medals and the like.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (S38). In S38, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of input sheets is not the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S38 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes after S35. On the other hand, in S38, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S38 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S39 described later. In this actual embodiment, the number of games that can be started in the BB3 (RB3) game state is "1", and the number of games that can be started in other game states (BB1, BB2 game states and general game states) is "3". There is (see FIG. 14).

After the processing of S32, if S35 is a NO determination or S38 is a YES determination, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the start switch is ON (S39). In S39, when the main CPU 51 determines that the start switch is not on (when the determination in S39 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes after S35.

On the other hand, in S39, when the main CPU 51 determines that the start switch is ON (when the determination in S39 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S40). By this process, the solenoid of the selector 35 (see FIG. 3) is not driven, and the inserted medals are ejected from the medal payout outlet 18. When this process is completed, the main CPU 51 ends the medal acceptance / start check process and shifts the process to S4 of the main flow (see FIG. 221).

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 223, the internal lottery process performed in S6 in the main flow (see FIG. 221) will be described. In this embodiment, the internal lottery process using the various internal lottery tables described below is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means for executing the determination process of the internal winning combination (internal winning combination determining means).

First, the main CPU 51 sets an internal lottery table according to the game state (S51). That is, the main CPU 51 grasps the current game state with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 47), and determines the type of the internal lottery table and the number of lottery times based on the internal lottery table determination table (see FIG. 14). decide. The number of lottery indicates the number of times for each winning number specified by the internal lottery table to subtract the lottery value and determine whether or not a digit has occurred.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a lottery value change process (S52). In this process, the lottery value of the winning number related to the re-game is changed according to the game state. The details of the lottery value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 224 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 acquires the random number value stored in the random number value storage area (S53). Then, the main CPU 51 sets "1" as the initial value of the winning number.

Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the internal lottery table to acquire the lottery value corresponding to the winning number, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value (S54).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the calculation result in S54 is less than "0" (negative value) (S55).

In S55, when the main CPU 51 determines that the calculation result is not less than "0" (when the determination in S55 is NO), the main CPU 51 updates the random number value and the winning number (S56). Specifically, the value of the calculation result is set as a random value, and the winning number is added by "1".

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not all the winning numbers have been checked (S57). When it is determined in S57 that the main CPU 51 has not checked all the winning numbers (when the determination in S57 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S54 and repeats the processes after S54.

On the other hand, in S57, when it is determined that the main CPU 51 has checked all the winning numbers (when the determination in S57 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets "0" as the data pointer (S58). That is, the main CPU 51 sets "0" as the small win / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer.

Here, returning to the description of the processing of S55 again, when the main CPU 51 determines in S55 that the calculation result is less than "0" (negative value) (when the determination in S55 is YES), the main CPU 51 , Acquire the data pointer for small win / replay and the data pointer for bonus according to the current winning number (S59).

Then, after the processing of S58 or S59, the main CPU 51 refers to the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 24 to 28) and acquires the internal winning combination based on the small winning combination / replay data pointer. (S60).

Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storage area (S61).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is "00000000000" (S62). In S62, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is not "000000" (when the determination in S62 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S67 described later.

On the other hand, in S62, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is "00000000000" (when the determination in S62 is YES), the main CPU 51 uses the bonus internal winning combination determination table ( Refer to FIG. 23), and acquire the internal winning combination based on the bonus data pointer (S63).

Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carrying-over combination storage area (S64).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not any of bits 0 to 2 of the carry-over combination storage area 1 is "1" (S65). In S65, when the main CPU 51 determines that any of bits 0 to 2 of the carry-over combination storage area 1 is not "1" (when the determination in S65 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S67 described later.

On the other hand, in S65, when the main CPU 51 determines that any of bits 0 to 2 of the carry-over combination storage area 1 is "1" (when the determination in S65 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the RT3 game state flag. It is set and the game state flag storage area is updated (S66). Specifically, "1" is stored (set) in bit 3 of the game state flag storage area 2 (see FIG. 47).

After the processing of S66, or when S62 or S65 determines NO, the main CPU 51 updates the internal winning combination storage area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area (S67). After that, the main CPU 51 ends the internal lottery process, and shifts the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 221).

[Lottery price change process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 224, the lottery value changing process performed in S52 in the flowchart of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 223) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the RT game state flag is on with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 47) (S71). Specifically, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not "1" is set in any of bits 0 to 3 in the game state flag storage area 2 (see FIG. 47). Then, in S71, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT game state flag is not on (when the determination in S71 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the lottery value change process and performs the process by the internal lottery process (see FIG. 223). ) Move to S53.

On the other hand, in S71, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT game state flag is ON (when the determination in S71 is YES), the main CPU 51 is an internal lottery table for RT corresponding to the RT game state that is turned on. (S72), the lottery value of the winning numbers (“33” to “41”) related to the re-game of the internal lottery table for the general game state (see FIG. 16) is changed with reference to. After that, the main CPU 51 ends the lottery value changing process, and shifts the process to S53 of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 223).

[Game lock lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 225, the game lock lottery process performed in S7 in the main flow (see FIG. 221) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is "00000000000" (S81). In S81, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is not "00000000000" (when the determination in S81 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S83 described later.

On the other hand, in S81, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is "00000000000" (when the determination in S81 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines that the current game is a bonus winning game. It is determined whether or not there is (S82). Here, the bonus winning game is a unit game in which the bonus is won without the bonus being carried over.

In S82, when the main CPU 51 determines that the current game is not a bonus winning game (when the determination in S82 is NO), the main CPU 51 wins the game lock flag corresponding to the winning game lock. Set the lock period value corresponding to the game lock in the lock timer. Then, the main CPU 51 ends the game lock lottery process, and shifts the process to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 221).

On the other hand, in S82, when the main CPU 51 determines that the current game is a bonus winning game (when the determination in S82 is YES) or when the determination in S81 is NO, the main CPU 51 has the RT game state of the RT2 game. It is determined whether or not the game is in a state and the winning number is "33" (S83). In S83, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT game state is the RT2 game state and the winning number is "33" (when the determination in S83 is YES), the main CPU 51 uses the game lock lottery table A (when the determination is YES). (See FIG. 40), the game lock lottery is performed based on the effect random value 1 stored in the effect random value storage area (not shown) (S84).

In S84, when the game lock (“game lock 9”) is won, the value of the game lock flag corresponding to the winning game lock and the value of the lock period (6000 msec) corresponding to the winning game lock are set in the lock timer. .. Then, after the processing of S84, the main CPU 51 ends the game lock lottery processing, and shifts the processing to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 221).

That is, in the present embodiment, the game lock lottery with reference to the game lock lottery table A (see FIG. 40) is performed when the RT game state is the RT2 game state and the winning number is "33". Therefore, the "game lock 9" is won when the game in the RT2 game state, that is, "ART" is being executed.

On the other hand, in S83, when the main CPU 51 determines that the condition that the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state and the winning number is "33" is not satisfied (when the determination in S83 is NO), the main CPU 51 , It is determined whether or not the winning number is "8" (S85). In S85, when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning number is not "8" (when the determination in S85 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S88 described later.

On the other hand, in S85, when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning number is "8" (when the determination in S85 is YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the game lock lottery table B (see FIG. 41) for production. A game lock lottery is performed based on the random number value 1 (S86). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not any of "Game Lock 1" to "Game Lock 4" has been won in the game lock lottery with reference to the game lock lottery table B (see FIG. 41) (S87). ..

In S87, when it is determined that the main CPU 51 has won any of "game lock 1" to "game lock 4" (when the determination in S87 is YES), the main CPU 51 has a game lock corresponding to the winning game lock. The flag and the lock period value (49,000 msec or 51,000 msec) corresponding to the winning game lock are set in the lock timer. Then, after the processing of S87, the main CPU 51 ends the game lock lottery processing, and shifts the processing to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 221).

On the other hand, in S87, when the main CPU 51 determines that the game lock has not been won (when the determination in S87 is NO), or when the determination in S85 is NO, the winning number of the main CPU 51 is "0". Whether or not it is determined (S88). In S88, when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning number is not "0" (when the determination in S88 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S90 described later.

On the other hand, in S88, when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning number is "0" (when the determination in S88 is YES), the main CPU 51 stores the effect random value value 1 in the effect random value storage area (not shown). It is integrated with the effect random value 2 stored in, and the integrated value is stored as the effect random value 1 in the effect random value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 53 (S89). As a result, the random number denominator can be effectively set to the square of 65536 only when the winning number is "0 (loss)".

After the processing of S89 or when the determination in S88 is NO, the main CPU 51 refers to the game lock lottery table C (see FIG. 42) and performs the game lock lottery based on the effect random number value 1 (S90). In S90, when any of "Game Lock 4" to "Game Lock 8" is won, the game lock flag corresponding to the winning game lock and the value of the lock period corresponding to the winning game lock (51000 msec, 3000 msec, 5000 msec, 7000 msec or 10000 msec) is set in the lock timer. Then, after the processing of S90, the main CPU 51 ends the game lock lottery processing, and shifts the processing to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 221).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the winning number is "0", the integrated value of the effect random value 1 and the effect random value 2 is set to the effect random value 1. That is, in the present embodiment, in the game lock lottery with reference to the game lock lottery table C, the game lock lottery with reference to the game lock lottery table A (see FIG. 40) or the game lock lottery table B (see FIG. 41). The configuration is such that the effect random value 1 used when performing the above is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the game lock lottery with reference to the game lock lottery table C, which is performed when a new effect random value 3 is provided (extracted) and the winning number is "0", the effect random value 2 and the effect random value are used. The integrated value with 3 may be used as the effect random value.

[Reel stop initial setting process]
Next, the reel stop initial setting process performed in S8 in the main flow (see FIG. 221) will be described with reference to FIG. 226.

First, the main CPU 51 acquires the rotation cylinder stop number based on the internal winning combination acquired in the internal lottery process of S6 in FIG. 221 with reference to the rotation cylinder stop number selection table (see FIG. 31). (S101).

Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 32), and acquires various information corresponding to the reel stop number based on the acquired reel stop number (S102). Specifically, the main CPU 51 includes a pull-in priority table selection table number, a pull-in priority table number, forward push table selection data, forward push table change data, and forward push corresponding to the acquired rotation stop number. The initial data for changing the time table and the table selection data for irregular pressing are acquired.

Next, the main CPU 51 stores the rotating identifier "0FFH (11111111B)" in the entire symbol code storage area (see FIG. 50) (S103).

Next, the main CPU 51 stores "3" in the stop button non-operation counter provided in the main RAM 53 (S104). After that, the main CPU 51 ends the reel stop initial setting process, and shifts the process to S9 of the main flow (see FIG. 221). The stop button non-operation counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons for which a stop operation has not been detected.

[Lock processing at the start of the game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 227, the game start lock process performed in S10 in the main flow (see FIG. 221) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 sets a reel effect pattern according to the game lock flag (S111). Specifically, as the reel effect pattern, any of the above-mentioned first to fifth reel effects is set.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the lock timer is "0" (S112). In S112, when the main CPU 51 determines that the lock timer value is not "0" (when the determination in S112 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S112 until the lock timer value becomes "0". stand by.

On the other hand, in S112, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the lock timer is "0" (when the determination in S112 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the lock process at the start of the game and performs the process in the main flow (when the game starts. Move to S11 (see FIG. 221).

[Pull-in priority storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 228, the pull-in priority storage process performed in S13 in the main flow (see FIG. 221) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 stores the stop button non-operation counter as the number of searches in the main RAM 53 (S121). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a search target reel determination process (S122). In this process, the main CPU 51 selects, for example, a predetermined reel from the rotating reels, and determines the selected reel as the search target reel.

For example, in S122, when all (three) reels are rotated, the left reel 3L is first determined as the search target reel. After that, various processes up to S131, which will be described later, are performed on the left reel 3L, and when returning to S122 again, the middle reel 3C is next determined as the search target reel. Then, various processes up to S131, which will be described later, are performed on the middle reel 3C, and when the process returns to S122 again, the right reel 3R is next determined as the search target reel.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pull-in priority table selection process (S123). In this process, the pull-in priority table is selected based on the internal winning combination (small winning combination / replay data pointer) and the operation stop button. The details of the pull-in priority table selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 229 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets "0" as the symbol position data and sets "21" as the number of symbol checks (S124). Then, the main CPU 51 performs a symbol code storage process (S125). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the current symbol position data located on the effective line of the search target reel is stored in the symbol code storage area. At this time, the symbol codes for the number of valid lines are stored. The details of the symbol code storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 230 described later.

Next, the main CPU 51 updates the display combination storage area (see FIG. 46) based on the symbol code acquired in S125 and the data of the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 50) (S126). At this point, a combination of symbols that can be displayed (displayable combination) is stored in the display combination storage area based on the stopped symbol regardless of whether or not the internal winning combination is won.

In the present embodiment, the information of the symbol code storage area (the symbol code and the corresponding displayable combination) is updated for each reel to be stopped. At this time, the displayable winning combination may be acquired from the data that defines the correspondence between the stopped reel symbol and the corresponding displayable winning combination, or the stopped reel symbol. And the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 7 to 11) may be collated and acquired. When the former method is used, the correspondence between the symbol and the displayable combination changes for each reel.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pull-in priority acquisition process (S127). In this process, the main CPU 51 gives priority to the combination in which the bit is "1" in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 46) and the bit is "1" in the internal winning combination storage area. The pull-in priority data is acquired by referring to the ranking table (see FIG. 38).

In addition, when the symbol of the winning combination (for example, the winning combination related to "cherry": see FIG. 9) is displayed on some reels, the reels that become "ANY" have the attraction priority of the winning combination. Do not get data. In addition, if there is a possibility that a winning combination that has not been won internally will be determined on the reel for which the winning is confirmed, the attraction priority data is set to "stop prohibited (all bits 0)".

Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired attraction priority data in the attraction priority data storage area (see FIG. 51) (S128). At this time, the pull-in priority data is stored in the pull-in priority data storage area so that the value of each priority and the bit of the storage area correspond to each other. Next, the main CPU 51 adds "1" to the symbol position data and subtracts "1" from the symbol check count (S129).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is "0" (S130). In S130, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of symbol checks is not "0" (when the determination in S130 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S125 and repeats the processes after S125.

On the other hand, in S130, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of symbol checks is "0" (when the determination in S130 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the search has been performed for the number of searches (S131).

When it is determined in S131 that the main CPU 51 has not searched for the number of searches (when the determination in S131 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S122 and repeats the processes after S122. On the other hand, when it is determined in S131 that the main CPU 51 has searched for the number of searches (when the determination in S131 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the pull-in priority storage process and performs the process in S14 of the main flow (see FIG. 221). Move to.

[Pull-in priority table selection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 229, the attraction priority table selection process performed in S123 in the flowchart of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 228) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the attraction-in priority table number is set, that is, whether or not the attraction-in priority table number is directly stored in the reel stop initial setting process (S8) (S141). ). When the main CPU 51 determines in S141 that the attraction priority table number is set (when the determination in S141 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the attraction priority table selection process and stores the process in the attraction priority order. The process moves to S124 of the process (see FIG. 228).

On the other hand, in S141, when the main CPU 51 determines that the attraction priority table number is not set (when the determination in S141 is NO), the main CPU 51 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 49) and the operation stop button. Refer to the area (see FIG. 48) and set the corresponding pull-in priority table number (S142). After that, the main CPU 51 ends the attraction priority table selection process, and shifts the process to S124 of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 228).

In S142, first, the main CPU 51 refers to the pressing order storage area and the operation stop button storage area, and acquires the data of the pressing order and the operation stop button. Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the attraction priority table selection table corresponding to the attraction priority table selection data, and acquires the attraction priority table number based on the pressing order and the operation stop button. After that, the main CPU 51 sets the acquired pull-in priority table number.

[Design code storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 230, the symbol code storage process performed in S125 in the flowchart of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 228) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 sets the effective line data (S151). In the present embodiment, the effective line is provided with one line (center line) as described above. Next, the main CPU 51 sets the check symbol position data of the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the effective line data (S152). For example, when the search target reel is the left reel 3L, since it is desired to acquire the information of the middle stage of the search target reel, the check symbol position data indicating the middle stage is set.

Next, the main CPU 51 acquires the symbol code of the check symbol position data (S153). Then, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired symbol code in the symbol code storage area, ends the symbol code storage process, and shifts the process to S126 of the pull-in priority storage process (see FIG. 228).

[Reel stop control process]
Next, the reel stop control process performed in S14 in the main flow (see FIG. 221) will be described with reference to FIG. 231. In this embodiment, the reel stop control process described below is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means (stop control means) for executing stop control of reel rotation (display of fluctuation of the symbol).

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S161). In S161, when the main CPU 51 determines that the valid stop button has not been pressed (when the determination in S161 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S161 and executes the pressing operation of the valid stop button. Wait until.

On the other hand, in S161, when the main CPU 51 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (when the determination in S161 is YES), the main CPU 51 has a pressing order storage area (see FIG. 49) and an operation stop button storage area (FIG. 49). 48) is updated (S162). Next, the main CPU 51 subtracts "1" from the stop button non-operation counter (S163).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S164). Then, the main CPU 51 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 53 based on the symbol counter (S165).

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a sliding piece number determination process (S166). The details of the sliding piece number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 232 described later. Next, the main CPU 51 transmits a reel stop command to the sub control circuit 42 (S167). The reel stop command transmitted in this process includes information such as the type of reel to be stopped, the number of slip pieces thereof, and the ON edge / OFF edge of the stop switch. The ON edge / OFF edge information of the stop switch may be monitored by an interrupt process described later, and the information may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 42.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines the scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determined in S166, and stores the determined stop scheduled position in the main RAM 53 (S168). In this process, the main CPU 51 adds the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and sets the result as the scheduled stop position.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the scheduled stop position determined in S168 as the search symbol position (S169). Next, the main CPU 51 performs the symbol code storage process described with reference to FIG. 230 (S170). After that, the main CPU 51 updates the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 50) using the symbol code acquired in S170 (S171).

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a control change process (S172). The details of the control change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 237 described later. Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pressed stop button has been released (S173). In S173, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pressed stop button has not been released (when the determination in S173 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S173 and waits until the pressed stop button is released. To do.

On the other hand, in S173, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pressed stop button has been released (when the determination in S173 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop command transmission process (S174). In this process, the main CPU 51 transmits a reel stop command to the sub control circuit 42. At this time, the data structure of the reel stop command to be transmitted is the same as that of the reel stop command transmitted in S167. However, the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S174 is different from the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S167.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is "0" (S175). When the main CPU 51 determines in S175 that the inactive counter is not "0" (when the determination in S175 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the pull-in priority storage process described with reference to FIG. 228 (S176). .. After that, the main CPU 51 returns the process to S161 and repeats the processes after S161.

On the other hand, in S175, when the main CPU 51 determines that the inactive counter is "0" (when the determination in S175 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the reel stop control process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. 221). (See), move to S15.

[Sliding piece number determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 232, the slip piece number determination process performed in S166 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 231) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 selects line mask data corresponding to the operation stop button based on the line mask data table (not shown) (S181). In this process, for example, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the main CPU 51 sets “1000000” as line mask data in the bit 7 corresponding to the “left reel A line” of the stop data. Select. Further, for example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, the main CPU 51 selects "00010000" as the line mask data in which "1" is set in the bit 4 corresponding to the "middle reel A line" of the stop data. To do. Further, for example, when the right stop button 17R is pressed, the main CPU 51 selects “00000010” in which “1” is set in bit 1 corresponding to the “right reel A line” of the stop data as line mask data. To do.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first stop (the stop button non-operation counter is “2”) (S182). When the main CPU 51 determines in S182 that it is not the first stop (when the determination in S182 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the second and third stop processes (S183). The details of the second and third stop processes will be described later with reference to FIG. 233 described later. After that, the main CPU 51 performs the process of S191 described later.

On the other hand, in S182, when the main CPU 51 determines that the first stop is performed (when the determination in S182 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the operation stop button is the left stop button (S184).

In S184, when the main CPU 51 determines that the operation stop button is the left stop button (when the determination in S184 is YES), the main CPU 51 acquires the table selection data and the symbol counter at the time of forward pressing (S185). In this process, the table selection data at the time of forward pressing is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 32). Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the forward-pressed first stop stop table corresponding to the forward-pressed table selection data, and acquires the slip piece number determination data and the change status based on the symbol counter (S186). After that, the main CPU 51 performs the process of S191 described later.

On the other hand, in S184, when the main CPU 51 determines that the operation stop button is not the left stop button (when the determination in S184 is NO), the main CPU 51 acquires the irregular pressing table selection data and selects the irregular pressing table. An irregular push stop table corresponding to the data is set (S187). In this process, the irregular pressing table selection data is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 32).

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a line change bit check process (S188). The details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 234 described later. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a line mask data change process (S189). The details of the line mask data change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 235 described later. After that, the main CPU 51 refers to the set irregular push stop table, and acquires the number of slip pieces determination data based on the line mask data and the stop start position (S190).

After the processing of S183, S186 or S190, the main CPU 51 performs the priority pull-in control processing (S191). In this process, the pull-in priority data is compared according to each symbol position in the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces "4" from the stop start position, and the most appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined. The details of the priority pull-in control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 236 described later. After that, the main CPU 51 ends the sliding piece number determination process, and shifts the process to S167 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 231).

[Second and third stop processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 233, the second and third stop processes performed in S183 in the flowchart of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 232) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is during the second stop operation (S201). In S201, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is not during the second stop operation (when the determination in S201 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S204 described later.

On the other hand, in S201, when the main CPU 51 determines that the second stop operation is in progress (when the determination in S201 is YES), the main CPU 51 pushes the stop button forward (the first stop is the left reel 3L). It is determined whether or not it is (S202). In S202, when the main CPU 51 determines that the push is not forward (when the determination in S202 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S204 described later.

On the other hand, in S202, when the main CPU 51 determines that the push is forward (when the determination in S202 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the line change bit check process (S203). The details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 234 described later.

After the processing of S203, or when the determination of S201 or S202 is NO, the main CPU 51 performs the line mask data change processing (S204). The details of the line mask data change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 235 described later. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a sliding piece number search process (S205). In this process, the slip piece number determination data is determined based on the stop start position with reference to the stop tables (FIGS. 33, 35 and 36).

For example, when the line mask data is "00010000" corresponding to the "middle reel A line", the main CPU 51 refers to the column of the "middle reel A line" of the bit 4. Then, for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces from the stop start position, a search for whether or not the corresponding data is "1" is sequentially performed. Next, the main CPU 51 calculates the difference from the symbol position where the corresponding data is "1" to the stop start position, and determines the calculated value as the slip piece number determination data. Then, after the processing of S205, the main CPU 51 ends the second and third stop processing, and shifts the processing to S191 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 232).

[Line change bit check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 234, the line change bit performed in S188 in the flowchart of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 232) and S203 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 233). The check process will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the change status is "1" or "2" (S211). In S211 when the main CPU 51 determines that the change status is "1" or "2" (when the determination in S211 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the corresponding line status (S212). In this process, in the present embodiment, the A-line status is set when the change status is "1", and the B-line status is set when the change status is "2". Then, after the processing of S212, the main CPU 51 ends the line change bit check processing, and performs the processing in S189 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 232) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 233). ) Move to the process of S204.

On the other hand, in S211 when the main CPU 51 determines that the change status is not "1" or "2" (when the determination in S211 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the line change bit is on. (S213). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the column corresponding to the "middle reel line change bit" or "right reel line change bit" in the stop table (see FIGS. 35 and 36), and the data corresponding to the stop start position is obtained. It is determined whether or not it is "1". Then, in S213, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data corresponding to the stop start position is not "1", that is, the line change bit is not on (when the determination in S213 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines that the line change bit is not on. The check process is completed, and the process is transferred to S189 of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 232) or S204 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 233).

On the other hand, in S213, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data corresponding to the stop start position is "1", that is, the line change bit is ON (when the determination in S213 is YES), the main CPU 51 is B. Set the line status (S214). The B line status is data used to change the line mask data. Then, after the processing of S214, the main CPU 51 ends the line change bit check processing, and performs the processing in S189 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 232) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 233). ) Moves to the processing of S204.

[Line mask data change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 235, the line mask data performed in S189 in the flowchart of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 232) and S204 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 233). The change process will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the C line status is set (S221). The C-line status is set when the forward push is performed in the second post-stop control change process (see FIG. 238) described later.

In S221, when the main CPU 51 determines that the C line status is set (when the determination in S221 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is the middle stop button. Determine (S222).

In S222, when the main CPU 51 determines that the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is the middle stop button (when the determination in S222 is YES), the main CPU 51 rotates the line mask data to the right twice (S223). ). If the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is the middle stop button in the forward push, the operation stop button at the time of the third stop becomes the right stop button. Therefore, the process of S223 changes the line mask data from "00000010" to "10000000". As a result, the column of bits 7 corresponding to the "right reel C line data" of the second and third stop tables (see FIG. 35) at the time of forward pressing is referred to. Then, after the processing of S223, the main CPU 51 finishes the line mask data change processing, and performs the processing in S190 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 232) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 233). ) Move to the process of S205.

On the other hand, in S222, when the main CPU 51 determines that the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is not the middle stop button (when the determination in S222 is NO), the main CPU 51 rotates the line mask data to the left twice (when the determination is NO). S224). If it is a forward push and the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is not the middle stop button, the operation stop button at the time of the third stop becomes the middle stop button. Therefore, the line mask data is changed from "00010000" to "01000000" by the processing of S224. As a result, the column of bits 6 corresponding to the "middle reel C line data" of the second and third stop tables at the time of forward pressing is referred to. Then, after the processing of S224, the main CPU 51 ends the line mask data change processing, and performs the processing in S190 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 232) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 233). ) Move to the process of S205.

Here, returning to the description of the process of S221 again, when the main CPU 51 determines in S221 that the C line status is not set (when the determination in S221 is NO), the B line status is set in the main CPU 51. It is determined whether or not the cooking is done (S225). When the main CPU 51 determines in S225 that the B line status is not set (when the determination in S225 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the line mask data change process and performs the process of determining the number of sliding pieces (FIG. FIG. 232) S190, or the process of S205 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 233).

On the other hand, in S225, when the main CPU 51 determines that the B line status is set (when the determination in S225 is YES), the main CPU 51 rotates the line mask data to the right once (S226). By this processing, for example, when the line mask data is "00000010", it is changed to "00000001". As a result, the column corresponding to "B line data" in the stop table (see FIGS. 35 and 36) is referenced. Then, after the processing of S226, the main CPU 51 finishes the line mask data change processing, and performs the processing in S190 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 232) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 233). ) Move to the process of S205.

[Priority pull-in control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 236, the priority pull-in control process performed in S191 in the flowchart of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 232) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 sets a search order table (see FIG. 39) according to the game state (S231). Next, the main CPU 51 sets initial values in the search order counter and the number of checks (S232). Specifically, the main CPU 51 sets "1" as an initial value in the search order counter. Further, the main CPU 51 sets the data length of the search order table as an initial value for the number of checks. Specifically, "5" is set as the initial value of the number of checks.

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the start address of the stop order table (not shown), and adds the address of the search order table based on the slip piece number determination data (S233).

Next, the main CPU 51 acquires the number of sliding pieces corresponding to the value of the search order counter (S234). Next, the main CPU 51 adds the acquired number of slip pieces to the expected address at the start of stopping, and acquires the attraction priority data (S235).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the attraction priority data acquired in S235 exceeds the attraction priority data acquired earlier (S236). In S236, when the main CPU 51 determines that the attraction priority data acquired in S235 does not exceed the attraction priority data acquired earlier (when the determination in S236 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S238 described later. Do.

On the other hand, in S236, when the main CPU 51 determines that the attraction priority data acquired in S235 exceeds the attraction priority data acquired earlier (when the determination in S236 is YES), the main CPU 51 slips acquired in S234. The number of pieces is evacuated (S237).

After the processing of S237 or when the determination in S236 is NO, the main CPU 51 subtracts "1" from the number of checks and adds "1" to the search order counter (S238).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of checks is "0" (S239). In S239, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of checks is not "0" (when the determination in S239 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S234 and repeats the processes after S234.

On the other hand, in S239, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of checks is "0" (when the determination in S239 is YES), the main CPU 51 restores the number of retracted sliding pieces (S240). After that, the main CPU 51 ends the priority pull-in control process and also ends the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 232).

[Control change processing]
Next, the control change process performed in S172 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 231) will be described with reference to FIG. 237.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is after the third stop (S251). In S251, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is after the third stop (when the determination in S251 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process and performs the process in S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 231). Move to.

On the other hand, in S251, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is not after the third stop (when the determination in S251 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is after the second stop (S252). In S252, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is after the second stop (when the determination in S252 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the control process after the second stop (S253). The details of the control process after the second stop will be described later with reference to FIG. 238 described later. Then, after the processing of S253, the main CPU 51 ends the control change processing and shifts the processing to S173 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 231).

On the other hand, in S252, when the main CPU 51 determines that it has not been after the second stop (when the determination in S252 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the push is forward (S254). When the main CPU 51 determines in S254 that the push is not forward (when the determination in S254 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process and shifts the process to S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 231).

On the other hand, in S254, when the main CPU 51 determines that the forward push is performed (when the determination in S254 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines the forward push control change table according to the forward push table change data (see FIG. 34). Is acquired and the number of searches is set (S255).

Next, the main CPU 51 acquires the scheduled stop position (S256). Then, the main CPU 51 updates the change target position according to the acquired scheduled stop position (S257).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the change target position updated in S257 matches the scheduled stop position (S258). In S258, when the main CPU 51 determines that the updated position to be changed does not match the scheduled stop position (when the determination in S258 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of searches is "0". (S259).

In S259, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of searches is not "0" (when the determination in S259 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S257 and repeats the processes after S257. On the other hand, in S259, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of searches is "0" (when the determination in S259 is YES), the main CPU 51 changes the table at the time of forward pressing. It is acquired as the third stop table number for stop, and the corresponding stop table is set (S260).

Next, the main CPU 51 sets “0” in the C line check data (S261). Then, after the processing of S261, the main CPU 51 ends the control change processing, and shifts the processing to S173 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 231).

Further, in S258, when the main CPU 51 determines that the updated position to be changed matches the scheduled stop position (when the determination in S258 is YES), the main CPU 51 is the second when the forward press is performed according to the value of the line change status. -Obtain the third stop table number and C line check data (S262).

Next, the main CPU 51 sets the corresponding stop table based on the second and third stop table numbers at the time of forward pressing (S263). Then, after the processing of S263, the main CPU 51 ends the control change processing, and shifts the processing to S173 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 231).

[Control change processing after the second stop]
Next, with reference to FIG. 238, the second post-stop control change process performed in S253 in the flowchart of the control change process (see FIG. 237) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the push is forward (S271). When the main CPU 51 determines in S271 that the push is not forward (when the determination in S271 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process after the second stop, and also ends the control change process (see FIG. 237). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in S271 that the main CPU 51 is pushing forward (when the determination in S271 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether the C line check data is on (whether the change status is "3") or not. (S272). The C-line check data is acquired by the process of S262 of the control change process (see FIG. 237). Then, in S272, when the main CPU 51 determines that the C line check data is not on (when the determination in S272 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process after the second stop and controls change process (FIG. FIG. See 237) also ends.

On the other hand, in S272, when the main CPU 51 determines that the C line check data is on (when the determination in S272 is YES), the main CPU 51 turns on the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop. It is determined whether or not it is (S273). In S273, when the main CPU 51 determines that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is not on (when the determination in S273 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process after the second stop. At the same time, the control change process (see FIG. 237) is also completed.

On the other hand, in S273, when the main CPU 51 determines that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is on (when the determination in S273 is YES), the main CPU 51 is pressed forward when stored. "1" is added to the second and third stop table numbers, and the corresponding stop table is set (S274). Next, the main CPU 51 sets the C line status (S275). Then, after the process of S275, the main CPU 51 ends the control change process after the second stop, and also ends the control change process (see FIG. 237).

[RT control processing]
Next, the RT control process performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 221) will be described with reference to FIG. 239. In the present embodiment, the RT control process described below is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means (replay time state control means) for executing the control process of the RT gaming state.

First, the main CPU 51 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 13) and checks the transition conditions of the RT gaming state that can be established in the RT gaming state of the migration source (current) (S281).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the transition condition of the RT gaming state is satisfied (S282). In S282, when the main CPU 51 determines that the transition condition of the RT gaming state is not satisfied (when the determination in S282 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S284 described later.

On the other hand, in S282, when the main CPU 51 determines that the transition condition of the RT gaming state is satisfied (when the determination in S282 is YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 13) and shifts. Based on the conditions, the RT game state flag of the migration destination is set to a predetermined bit of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 47), and the game state flag storage area is updated (S283).

After the processing of S283, or when the determination of S282 is NO, the main CPU 51 performs the display command transmission processing (S284). Specifically, the main CPU 51 transmits a display command to the sub control circuit 42. The display command is configured to include parameters for specifying the display combination, the number of payouts, and the like. Then, after the processing of S284, the main CPU 51 ends the RT control processing and shifts the processing to S18 of the main flow (see FIG. 221).

[Production control process at the end of the game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the effect control process at the end of the game performed in S18 in the main flow (see FIG. 221) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 refers to the output condition table (see FIG. 43) and outputs a jackpot signal (S291). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state (S292). In S292, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT2 gaming state (when the determination in S292 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S301 described later.

On the other hand, in S292, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT game state is the RT2 game state (when the determination in S292 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the game lock type is "game lock 9". Is determined (S293). In S293, when the main CPU 51 determines that the type of the game lock is "game lock 9" (when the determination in S293 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the game end effect control process and performs the process in the main flow. Move to S19 (see FIG. 221).

On the other hand, in S293, when the main CPU 51 determines that the type of the game lock is not "game lock 9" (when the determination in S293 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is "normal lip". Is determined (S294). In S294, when the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is not a "normal lip" (when the determination in S294 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the effect control process at the end of the game and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. 221). (See) to S19.

On the other hand, in S294, when the main CPU 51 determines that the internal winning combination is a "normal lip" (when the determination in S294 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the output counter is "0". Is determined (S295). In S295, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the output counter is not "0" (when the determination in S295 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S297 described later.

On the other hand, in S295, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the output counter is "0" (when the determination in S295 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets "3" in the output counter (S296). ..

After the processing of S296 or when the determination in S295 is NO, the main CPU 51 refers to the subtraction condition table (see FIG. 44) and determines whether or not the subtraction condition is satisfied (S297). In S297, when the main CPU 51 determines that the subtraction condition is not satisfied (when the determination in S297 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S301 described later.

On the other hand, in S297, when the main CPU 51 determines that the subtraction condition is satisfied (YES in S297), the main CPU 51 subtracts "1" from the value of the output counter (S298).

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the output counter is "0" (S299). In S299, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the output counter is not "0" (when the determination in S299 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the effect control process at the end of the game and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. 221) Move to S19.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S299 that the value of the output counter is "0" (when the determination in S299 is YES), the main CPU 51 turns on the output of the jackpot signal "3" (S300). As a result, the jackpot signal "3" is transmitted to the hall computer or the calling device 100 (see FIG. 4).

After the processing of S300, or when S292 or S297 is determined to be NO, the main CPU 51 sets "0" in the output counter (S301). Then, after the processing of S301, the main CPU 51 ends the effect control processing at the end of the game, and shifts the processing to S19 of the main flow (see FIG. 221).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state, "3" is set in the output counter, and the value of the output counter is set to "1" each time the subtraction condition is satisfied. Subtract. Then, when the value of the output counter becomes "0", the output of the jackpot signal "3" is turned on. That is, in the RT2 game state, the output of the jackpot signal "3" is not turned on unless the subtraction condition is satisfied three times. As a result, even if the RT2 game state is accidentally entered when the "ART" is not won, such as when the recommended stop operation is not performed, the jackpot signal "3" is immediately sent to the hall computer or the calling device. It can be prevented from being transmitted to 100 (see FIG. 4).

[Bonus end check process]
Next, the bonus end check process performed in S20 in the main flow (see FIG. 221) will be described with reference to FIG. 241.

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the "BB" ("BB1" to "BB3") is operating by referring to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 47) (S321). In S321, when the main CPU 51 determines that "BB" is not operating (when the determination in S321 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check process and performs the process in S21 of the main flow (see FIG. 221). Move to.

On the other hand, in S321, when the main CPU 51 determines that "BB" is in operation (when the determination in S321 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0". Is determined (S322).

In S322, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" (when the determination in S322 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the bonus end processing (S323). In this process, the main CPU 51 clears the bonus end number counter and turns off the game state flag (BB game state flag) corresponding to the operating "BB". If the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0", it means that the payout of medals exceeded 263 (BB1), 60 (BB2) or 14 (BB3) during the BB game state. To do.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus end command transmission process (S324). In this process, the main CPU 51 transmits a bonus end command to the sub-control circuit 42. The bonus end command includes information indicating that the bonus game has ended.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process at the end of the bonus (S325). Then, after the processing of S325, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check processing, and shifts the processing to S21 of the main flow (see FIG. 221).

On the other hand, in S322, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than "0" (when the determination in S322 is NO), the main CPU 51 sets each value of the winning count counter and the playable count counter. Update (S326). The value of the winning count counter is subtracted by "1" when a small winning combination (a winning combination with a medal payout) is displayed, and the gameable count counter value is "1" for one game regardless of the stop symbol. It is subtracted.

Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter or the playable number counter is “0” (S327). When the main CPU 51 determines in S327 that the value of the winning count counter or the value of the playable counter is not "0" (when the determination in S327 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check process. , The process is transferred to S21 of the main flow (see FIG. 221).

On the other hand, in S327, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the winning count counter or the value of the playable count counter is "0" (when the determination in S327 is YES), the main CPU 51 processes at the end of RB. (S328). Specifically, processing such as turning off the game status flag (RB game status flag) corresponding to "RB", clearing the winning counter and the game counter is performed. After that, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check process, and shifts the process to S21 of the main flow (see FIG. 221).

[Bonus operation check process]
Next, the bonus operation check process performed in S21 in the main flow (see FIG. 221) will be described with reference to FIG. 242. In the present embodiment, in the bonus operation check process described below, if the symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination related to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the valid line (if it is a bonus winning), the bonus game The operation start processing of is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a means for operating the bonus game (special game operating means).

First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not "BB" ("BB1" to "BB3") is in operation (S331). In S331, when the main CPU 51 determines that "BB" is not operating (when the determination in S331 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S334 described later.

On the other hand, in S331, when the main CPU 51 determines that "BB" is in operation (when the determination in S331 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not "RB" is in operation (S332). ). In S332, when the main CPU 51 determines that "RB" is in operation (when the determination in S332 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 221). Move to S2.

On the other hand, in S332, when the main CPU 51 determines that "RB" is not operating (when the determination in S332 is NO), the main CPU 51 processes during RB operation based on the bonus operation table (see FIG. 12). (S333). Then, after the processing of S333, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 221).

Further, when the determination in S331 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the bonus game is a prize (S334). In S334, when the main CPU 51 determines that the bonus game is not a prize (when the determination in S334 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S338 described later.

On the other hand, in S334, when the main CPU 51 determines that the bonus game is a winning bonus (when the determination in S334 is YES), the main CPU 51 selects the winning bonus game based on the bonus operating table (see FIG. 12). The corresponding bonus operation time processing is performed (S335). In the present embodiment, in this process, the main CPU 51 sets "1" in the corresponding bit in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 47) with reference to the bonus operation time table (see FIG. 12). The numerical value of the bonus end number counter is set to a predetermined value (“263” in the case of “BB1”, “60” in the case of “BB2”, and “14” in the case of “BB3”). Further, in this process, the RB operating process described in S333 is also performed.

Next, the main CPU 51 clears the value of the carry-over combination storage area (S336). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus start command transmission process (S337). In this process, the main CPU 51 transmits a bonus start command to the sub-control circuit 42. The bonus start command includes information indicating that the bonus game has started. Then, after the processing of S337, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check processing and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 221).

Further, when the determination in S334 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the winning combination related to the replay is a prize (S338). In S338, when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning combination related to the replay is not a prize (when the determination in S338 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 221). Move to S2.

On the other hand, in S338, when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning combination related to the replay is a prize (when the determination in S338 is YES), the main CPU 51 requests the automatic insertion of medals (S339). That is, the main CPU 51 copies the input number counter to the automatic input number counter. Then, after the processing of S339, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check processing and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 221).

[Interrupt processing controlled by the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 243, for example, an interrupt process controlled by the main CPU 51 performed in S12 in the main flow (see FIG. 221) will be described.

First, the main CPU 51 saves the register (S341). Next, the main CPU 51 performs an input port check process (S342). In this process, signals input from various switches such as the stop switch 17S are checked.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a timer update process (S343). In this process, the main CPU 51 performs a process of subtracting the value of the lock timer for each interrupt process, for example. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a communication data transmission process (S344). In this process, various commands are mainly transmitted to the main control circuit 41 and the sub control circuit 42 as appropriate.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel control process (S345). In this process, the main CPU 51 starts rotating the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when all the reels are requested to start rotating, and then each reel rotates at a constant speed. The three stepping motors 61L, 61C and 61R are driven and controlled. When the number of sliding pieces is determined, the main CPU 51 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding pieces. Then, the main CPU 51 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the scheduled stop position (the symbol at the scheduled stop position reaches the area on the effective line of the display window) of the corresponding reel. The corresponding stepping motor is driven and controlled so that the rotation is decelerated and stopped. Further, in the present embodiment, in the processing of S345, in addition to the above-mentioned normal acceleration processing, constant speed processing and stop processing, when a reel effect pattern is set at the time of acceleration processing, the reel effect pattern is supported. It also performs reel production (reel action) and lock control processing.

Next, the main CPU 51 performs a lamp 7-segment drive process (S346). In this process, the main CPU 51 drives and controls the 7-segment display 6 to display the number of payouts, the number of credits, and the like. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a register reset process (S347). After that, the main CPU 51 ends the interrupt process.

<Explanation of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 244 to 265, the contents of various processes (tasks) executed by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 42 by using the program will be described. Various tables required for various processes of the sub CPU 81 described below are stored in the sub ROM 82, and various control flags, various control counters, various storage areas, and the like are provided in the sub RAM 83 and the like.

[Main board communication task]
First, the main board communication task executed by the sub CPU 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 244. In this embodiment, various errors in the command data are detected in the main board communication task described below and the reception interrupt process described later (see FIG. 265 described later). That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means (command error detecting means) for detecting various errors in the command data.

First, the sub CPU 81 checks the reception of the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41 and acquires the command registration data (S501). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is received command data (S502).

In S502, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no received command data (when the determination in S502 is NO), the sub CPU 81 returns the process to S501 and repeats the processes after S501. On the other hand, in S502, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is received command data (when the determination in S502 is YES), the sub CPU 81 extracts the type of the received command and the BCC (S503). In the present embodiment, the command data is composed of 8 bytes of data, the first byte of data indicates the type of command, and the last 8 bytes of data is BCC.

Next, the sub CPU 81 calculates BCC from the command data (S504). In this process, BCC is obtained by calculating the exclusive OR (XOR) of the 7th byte data from the 1st byte data of the command. The "BCC" here is a kind of thing generally called "sum value (or thumb)", and the "BCC error" is the same as the error called "sum abnormality" or "sum value abnormality". Has the meaning of.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the BCC value extracted in S503 is the same as the BCC (calculated BCC) value calculated in S504 (S505). In S505, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the BCC value extracted in S503 is the same as the BCC value calculated in S504 (when the determination in S505 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S507 described later. ..

On the other hand, in S505, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the BCC value extracted in S503 is not the same as the BCC value calculated in S504 (when the determination in S505 is NO), the sub CPU 81 has some abnormality during the game (when the determination is NO). It is determined that (including fraudulent activity) has occurred, and the command error flag is turned on (S506). The command error flag is flag data indicating whether or not some error has occurred in the command data, and the command error flag is turned on when a command error (communication error) occurs.

After the processing of S506, or when the determination of S505 is YES, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the command type is valid (S507).

In the present embodiment, the command type is associated with any of 16 types of codes "01H" to "10H", and when the game is operating normally, the command type is "01H" to "01H". It becomes one of "10H". Therefore, in the process of S507, if the code of the received command type is any of "01H" to "10H", the sub CPU 81 determines that the command type is valid. On the other hand, when the command type code is other than "01H" to "10H", the sub CPU 81 determines that some abnormality (including cheating) has occurred during the game, and determines that the command type is invalid. To do.

In S507, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the command type is valid (when the determination in S507 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S509 described later. On the other hand, in S507, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the command type is not valid (when the determination in S507 is NO), the sub CPU 81 considers that the received command is an invalid command and turns on the command error flag ( S508).

After the processing of S508, or when the determination of S507 is YES, the sub CPU 81 performs the command sequence check processing (S509). In this process, the sub CPU 81 checks the reception order of the commands (command types) transmitted from the main control circuit 41.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the command sequence is normal (S510). In this process, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the reception order of the commands (command types) checked in S509 is a predetermined order (order at the time of normal operation).

When the player is playing the game in a normal operation, the order is usually "BET", "start", "reel rotation start", "stop", "design combination display", and "medal payout" (hereinafter, "medal payout"). The operations are performed in the basic order), and the corresponding type of command is transmitted to the sub CPU 81 at each operation. Therefore, when the reception order of the command types corresponds to this basic order, the sub CPU 81 determines that the command sequence is normal. On the other hand, when the reception order of the command types does not correspond to the basic order, the sub CPU 81 determines that some abnormality (including cheating) has occurred during the game, and determines that the command sequence is abnormal. ..

In the present embodiment, the maximum number of medals to be inserted is three, and the BET command may be generated up to three times in succession. Further, since the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function of operating a bonus game, a bonus start command and a bonus end command may be generated between a display command and a payout command. In the present embodiment, these commands are not considered in the determination process of S510, and the sub CPU 81 determines that the command sequence is abnormal only when the command reception order is not the above-mentioned basic order. The present invention is not limited to this, and the BET command, the bonus start command, the bonus end command, and the like may be included in the conditions of the basic order used in the determination process of S510.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S510 that the command sequence is normal (when the determination in S510 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S512 described later. On the other hand, in S510, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the command sequence is not normal (when the determination in S510 is NO), the sub CPU 81 turns on the command error flag (S511).

After the processing of S511 or when the determination of S510 is YES, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a command different from the previous one has been received (S512). When it is determined in S512 that the sub CPU 81 has not received a command different from the previous one (when the determination in S512 is NO), the sub CPU 81 returns the process to S501 and repeats the processes after S501.

On the other hand, in S512, when the sub CPU 81 determines that a command different from the previous one has been received (when the determination in S512 is YES), the sub CPU 81 stores a message in the message queue based on the received command (S513). ). The message queue is a mechanism for exchanging information between processes. Then, after the processing of S513, the sub CPU 81 returns the processing to S501 and repeats the processing after S501.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when there is an abnormality in the BCC, type, or sequence of the received command in the main board communication task, the command error flag is turned on. The command error flag is turned off when a specific operation is performed on the door key with the door key inserted in the door key hole provided in the front door 2b. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the door key is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front side (player side) of the pachislot machine 1 with the door key inserted in the door key hole, the front door 2b is opened and left. When the rotation operation is performed in the clockwise direction, a reset process or a power failure recovery process is performed. In the present embodiment, the command error flag is turned off by performing a reset process or a power failure recovery process by rotating the door key counterclockwise. In the present embodiment, the command error flag is not turned off in operations other than this operation.

[Direction registration task]
Next, the effect registration task executed by the sub CPU 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 245.

First, the sub CPU 81 retrieves a message from the message queue (S521). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is a message in the message queue (S522). In S522, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no message in the message queue (when the determination in S522 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S525 described later.

On the other hand, in S522, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is a message in the message queue (when the determination in S522 is YES), the sub CPU 81 copies the game information from the message (S523). In this process, for example, various data such as an internal winning combination, a type of reel whose rotation has stopped, a display combination, and a game state flag, which are specified by parameters, are copied to a storage area (not shown) provided in the sub RAM 83. The reel.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the effect content determination process (S524). In this process, the sub CPU 81 determines the effect content, registers the effect data, and the like according to the type of the received command. The details of the effect content determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 246, which will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 81 registers the animation data (S525). Next, the sub CPU 81 registers the sound data (S526). Next, the sub CPU 81 registers the lamp data (S527). It should be noted that these registration processes are performed based on the effect data registered in the effect content determination process of S524. After the processing of S527, the sub CPU 81 returns the processing to S521 and repeats the processing after S521.

[Production content determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the effect content determination process performed in S524 in the flowchart of the effect registration task (see FIG. 245) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the start command is received (S531).

In S531, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the start command is received (YES in S531), the sub CPU 81 performs the start command reception process (S532). In this process, the sub CPU 81 extracts the effect random value, determines the effect number by lottery based on the internal winning combination, and registers the effect number. Here, the effect number is data that specifies the content of the effect to be executed this time. The details of the process at the time of receiving the start command will be described later with reference to FIG. 247 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 81 registers the effect data at the start according to the registered effect number (S533). The effect data is data that specifies animation data, sound data, and lamp data. Therefore, when the effect data is registered, the corresponding animation data and the like are determined, and the effect such as displaying an image is executed. Then, after the processing of S533, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S525 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 245).

On the other hand, in S531, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not when the start command is received (when the determination in S531 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is when the reel stop command is received (S534).

In S534, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the reel stop command is being received (when the determination in S534 is YES), the sub CPU 81 is stopped according to the registered effect number and the type of the operation stop button. Register the production data (S535). After that, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S525 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 245).

On the other hand, in S534, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the reel stop command is not received (NO in S534), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the display command is received (S536).

In S536, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the display command is being received (when the determination in S536 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the display command reception processing (S537). The details of the processing at the time of receiving the display command will be described later with reference to FIG. 255 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 81 registers the effect data at the time of display according to the registered effect number and display combination (S538). After that, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S525 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 245).

On the other hand, in S536, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the time when the display command is received (when the determination in S536 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the time when the payout end command is received (S539). In S539, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the payout end command has been received (YES in S539), the sub CPU 81 performs the payout end command reception time process (S540). After that, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S525 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 245).

On the other hand, in S539, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the time when the payout end command is received (when the determination in S539 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the time when the bonus start command is received (S541).

In S541, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the bonus start command has been received (YES in S541), the sub CPU 81 performs the bonus start command reception processing (S542). In this process, the sub CPU 81 mainly registers the effect data for starting the bonus. The details of the processing at the time of receiving the bonus start command will be described later with reference to FIG. 261 described later. Then, after the processing of S542, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S525 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 245).

On the other hand, in S541, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the time when the bonus start command is received (when the determination in S541 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the time when the bonus end command is received (S543).

In S543, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the time when the bonus end command is received (when the determination in S543 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and performs the process in S525 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 245). Move to.

On the other hand, in S543, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the bonus end command is received (YES in S543), the sub CPU 81 performs the bonus end command reception process (S544). In this process, the sub CPU 81 mainly registers the effect data for ending the bonus. The details of the processing at the time of receiving the bonus end command will be described later with reference to FIG. 262 described later. Then, after the processing of S544, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S525 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 245).

[Processing when receiving start command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 247, the process at the time of receiving the start command performed in S532 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 246) will be described. In the present embodiment, the start command reception processing described below is executed by the sub-control circuit 42.

First, the sub CPU 81 performs a lottery flag determination process (S551). The details of the lottery flag determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 248 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a mode lottery process (S552). In the present embodiment, when the sub-game state is the "general state", a plurality of modes having different probabilities of winning the "CZ (chance zone)" are provided. In the process of S552, a lottery for transitioning a plurality of modes in this "general state" is performed. In this transition lottery, a mode lottery table (not shown) in which the lottery value of each mode is set according to the internal winning combination is used.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a CZ lottery process (S553). In this process, a CZ lottery table (not shown) in which a lottery value of "CZ (chance zone)" is set according to the internal winning combination and the mode is used.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an ART lottery process (S554). The details of the ART lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 249 described later. Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a process during ART (S555). The details of the processing during ART will be described later with reference to FIG. 250 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs VR-related processing (S556). The details of the VR-related processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 251 described later. Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an illegal process when receiving the start command (S557). The details of the illegal processing at the time of receiving the start command will be described later with reference to FIG. 252 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an effect determination process (S558). The details of the effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 253, which will be described later. Then, after the processing of S553, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command, and shifts the processing to S533 of the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 246).

[Lottery flag determination process]
Next, the lottery flag determination process performed in S551 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 247) will be described with reference to FIG. 248. In the present embodiment, the lottery flag determination process described below is executed by the sub-control circuit 42.

First, the sub CPU 81 changes the small winning combination / replay data pointer based on the special flag lottery table (see FIG. 57) (S561). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the small winning combination / replay data pointer is “9” (S562).

In S562, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "9" (when the determination in S562 is YES), the sub CPU 81 is based on the lottery (winning with a probability of 1/10). , Change the data pointer for small role / replay to "40" (S563). After the process of S563, the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S566 described later.

On the other hand, in S562, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the small winning combination / replay data pointer is not "9" (when the determination in S562 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines that the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "43". It is determined whether or not there is (S564). In S564, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the small winning combination / replay data pointer is not "43" (when the determination in S564 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S566 described later.

On the other hand, in S564, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "43" (when the determination in S564 is YES), the sub CPU 81 is drawn (with a probability of 1/2). Based on this, the small role / replay data pointer is changed to "42" (S565).

After the processing of S563 or S565, or when the determination in S564 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines various lottery flags based on various lottery flag lottery tables (see FIGS. 57 to 70) and stores them in the sub RAM 83 (see FIGS. 57 to 70). S566). Then, after the processing of S566, the sub CPU 81 ends the lottery flag determination processing, and shifts the processing to S552 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 247).

[ART lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 249, the ART lottery process performed in S554 in the flowchart of the process at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 247) will be described. In the present embodiment, the ART lottery process described below is executed by the sub-control circuit 42. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means (specific game state determination means) for determining the operation of the ART (specific game state) by lottery.

First, the sub CPU 81 is based on various ART lottery tables (see FIGS. 71 to 88, 92 to 96, 98 to 121, 123 to 130, 136, 137, 139, 140). Then, ART lottery is performed (S571). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result is "0" (off) (S572). In S572, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result is "0" (when the determination in S572 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the ART lottery process and starts the process when the start command is received (see FIG. 247). ) S555.

On the other hand, in S572, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result is not "0" (when the determination in S572 is NO), the sub CPU 81 is based on the stock content determination table (see FIG. 144) of the ART lottery result. Check the contents of the winning (S573).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not "B_ART" or "D_ART" has been won (S574). In S574, when it is determined that the sub CPU 81 has not won "B_ART" or "D_ART" (when the determination in S574 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S576 described later.

On the other hand, in S574, when it is determined that the sub CPU 81 has won "B_ART" or "D_ART" (when the determination in S574 is YES), the sub CPU 81 uses the ART stock area distribution lottery table (FIGS. 89, 90, FIG. 132-see FIG. 135) to determine the ART stock area based on the lottery flag (S575). That is, by this processing, one of the ART stock area A and the ART stock area B is determined as the ART stock area for storing the winning information of "B_ART" or "D_ART".

After the processing of S575, or when S574 is determined to be NO, the sub CPU 81 refers to the table number determination table (see FIGS. 91, 97, 122, 131, 138, and 141) of the ART lottery table. The table number is acquired based on the type and the lottery flag (S576).

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the corresponding winning information in the storage area corresponding to the winning content in the sub storage area (S577). For example, when "B_ART" or "D_ART" is won, the winning information (ART identification information and table number) is stored in the ART stock area A or the ART stock area B determined in S575. Further, when "G_ART" is won, the winning information (table number and ART mode at the time of stock) is stored in the combined stock area. If "R_ART" is won, "1" is set in the rocket flag. In addition, when winning "VR (Viking Rush)", "1" is added to the VR stock counter.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines the number of ART precursor games based on the precursor game number lottery table (see FIGS. 165 to 170), and sets the value in the ART precursor counter (S578). Then, after the processing of S578, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART lottery processing, and shifts the processing to S555 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 247).

[Processing during ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 250, the ART processing performed in S555 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 247) will be described. In the present embodiment, in the ART processing described below, if a command error occurs during ART, ART generation suppression processing (game regulation processing) is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means (second game regulation means) for suppressing the occurrence of ART when a command error occurs during ART.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the command error flag is in the ON state (S581).

In S581, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the command error flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S581 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during ART and starts the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 247). ) S556. On the other hand, in S581, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the command error flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S581 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not "B_ART" is operating (S582). ..

In S582, when the sub CPU 81 determines that "B_ART" is in operation (when the determination in S582 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a lottery process for adding the number of games (S583). In this process, when the number of additional games is determined, the determined number of additional games is added to the ART game number counter. Then, after the processing of S583, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S556 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 247).

On the other hand, in S582, when the sub CPU 81 determines that "B_ART" is not operating (when the determination in S582 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not "D_ART" is operating (S584). .. In S584, when the sub CPU 81 determines that "D_ART" is not operating (when the determination in S584 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during ART and processes the process when the start command is received (see FIG. 247). Move to S556.

On the other hand, in S584, when the sub CPU 81 determines that "D_ART" is in operation (when the determination in S584 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a continuous stock lottery process (S585). If the continuous stock is determined in this process, "1" is added to the continuous stock counter. Then, after the processing of S585, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S556 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 247).

In the present embodiment, as described above, when a command error occurs during ART, a process of clearing the number of ART games and the number of sets (continuous stock) added after the command error occurs is performed. In order to execute this process, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that a command error has occurred (the command error flag is in the ON state) in the process during ART, the number of games is added to the lottery process (S583). And the continuous stock lottery process (S585) is not performed. By this process, the number of ART games and the number of sets are not added, so that the same function as the process of clearing the number of ART games and the number of sets can be obtained. The present invention is not limited to this, and when a command error occurs during ART, the number of additional games of ART determined in the lottery process for adding the number of games (S583) or the continuous stock lottery process (S585). The number of additional sets of ART determined in the above may be cleared after each lottery process.

[VR-related processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 251, the VR-related processing performed in S556 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 247) will be described. In the present embodiment, in the VR-related processing described below, a process of determining the touch correspondence (correct answer content or incorrect answer content of the touch operation) in the alternative effect is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means for determining the touch correspondence (selection correspondence determining means).

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the "VR (hiking rush)" is in operation (S591). In S591, when the sub CPU 81 determines that "VR (hiking rush)" is not in operation (when the determination in S591 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the "game lock 9" has been won ( S592). That is, it is determined whether or not the data stored in bit 0 of the game lock flag storage area 2 (see FIG. 52) is “1”.

In S592, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the "game lock 9" is not a win (when the determination in S592 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the VR-related processing and performs the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 247). ) S557.

On the other hand, in S592, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the "game lock 9" is a win (when the determination in S592 is YES), the sub CPU 81 is a lottery table for billy touch correct / incorrect answers at the time of VR lock (FIG. 145). Based on (see), the touch correspondence (correct answer content or incorrect answer content of touch operation: first selection correspondence information) is determined (S593). Then, after the processing of S593, the sub CPU 81 ends the VR-related processing, and shifts the processing to S557 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 247).

Here, returning to the description of the process of S591 again, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S591 that "VR (hiking rush)" is in operation (when the determination in S591 is YES), the sub CPU 81 is VR. Based on the medium revolution lottery table (see FIGS. 150 to 164), the winning and non-winning of the revolution activation is determined, and the value of the VR medium revolution flag is set (S594).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines the touch correspondence (correct answer content or incorrect answer content of the touch operation: first selection correspondence information) based on the billy touch lottery table in VR (see FIGS. 146 to 149) (S595). .. Then, after the processing of S595, the sub CPU 81 ends the VR-related processing, and shifts the processing to S557 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 247).

[Illegal processing when receiving start command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 252, the start command reception illegal processing performed in S557 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing flowchart (see FIG. 247) will be described.

In the present embodiment, in the start command reception illegal processing described below, if a command error occurs during "VR", ART generation suppression processing (game regulation processing) is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means (first game regulation means) for suppressing the occurrence of ART when a command error occurs during "VR". Further, in the illegal processing at the time of receiving the start command described below, the touch correspondence (correct answer content or incorrect answer content of the touch operation) determined in the VR-related processing is separately saved as the touch correspondence for the animation task. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means (selection-corresponding storage means) for separately storing the touch correspondence determined by the VR-related processing as the touch correspondence for the animation task.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is a touch correspondence (correct answer content or incorrect answer content of the touch operation) of the alternative effect (touch challenge) (whether or not the touch correspondence is determined) (S601). ).

In S601, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no touch correspondence (when the determination in S601 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S603 described later. On the other hand, in S601, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is a touch correspondence (when the determination in S601 is YES), the sub CPU 81 inputs the determined touch correspondence (correct answer content or incorrect answer content of the touch operation). , Separately, save (copy) as information for touch support for animation tasks (second selection support information) (S602). The touch correspondence for the animation task is used in the correctness determination processing of the touch operation performed in the animation task described later (see FIG. 263 described later) (see FIG. 264 described later).

After the processing of S602 or when the determination in S601 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a command error is occurring by referring to the on / off state of the command error flag (S603). In S603, when the sub CPU 81 determines that no command error has occurred (NO in S603), the sub CPU 81 ends the illegal processing at the time of receiving the start command, and performs the processing at the time of receiving the start command (FIG. 247). (See) to S558.

On the other hand, in S603, when the sub CPU 81 determines that a command error is occurring (when the determination in S603 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not "VR (hiking rush)" is in operation. (S604). In S604, when the sub CPU 81 determines that "VR (hiking rush)" is not in operation (when the determination in S604 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the illegal processing at the time of receiving the start command and receives the start command. Move to S558 of time processing (see FIG. 247).

On the other hand, in S604, when the sub CPU 81 determines that "VR (hiking rush)" is in operation (when the determination in S604 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the value of the ART game number counter to "0". Then, the value of the continuous stock counter is set to "0" (S605). That is, if a command error occurs during the operation of "VR (Hiking Rush)", the sub CPU 81 determines that some fraudulent act (goto act) has been performed during "VR" and is currently in stock. Clear the number of ART games and the number of sets (set to "0"). Then, after the processing of S605, the sub CPU 81 ends the illegal processing at the time of receiving the start command, and shifts the processing to S558 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 247).

[Direction decision processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 253, the effect determination process performed in S558 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 247) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the continuous effect (continuous game) is in operation (S611). In this process, if the value of "scenario No." or "map No." is other than "0", the sub CPU 81 determines that the continuous effect (continuous game) is in operation.

In S611, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the continuous effect (continuation game) is not in operation (when the determination in S611 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the effect lottery process (S612). In this effect lottery process, the sub CPU 81 determines the "effect No." (including the development effect) based on the lottery flag, the number of precursor games, etc. with reference to the effect lottery table (not shown), and the determination is made. The "effect No." is set in the sub RAM 83. The development effect in the present embodiment is composed of a title display game and a continuous effect (continuous game) following the title display game.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the "effect No." determined in S612 is a development effect (S613). In S613, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the "effect No." determined in S612 is not a development effect (when the determination in S613 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the effect determination process and receives a start command. The process (see FIG. 247) also ends.

On the other hand, in S613, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the "effect No." determined in S612 is the development effect (when the determination in S613 is YES), the sub CPU 81 has the determined "effect No.". , It is determined whether or not it is the "production No." corresponding to the development production 1 (S614).

In S614, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determined "effect No." is the "effect No." corresponding to the development effect 1 (when the determination in S614 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines the development effect 1 The title lottery process is performed with reference to the title lottery table (see FIG. 171) (S615). By this process, the "title No." for the development effect 1 is determined, and the "title No." is registered in the sub RAM 83.

Next, the sub CPU 81 refers to the scenario lottery table (not shown) and performs the scenario lottery process (S616). By this process, the "scenario No." for the development effect 1 is determined, and the "scenario No." is registered in the sub RAM 83. Then, after the process of S616, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect determination process and also ends the start command reception process (see FIG. 247).

On the other hand, in S614, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determined "effect No." is not the "effect No." corresponding to the development effect 1 (when S614 is a NO determination), the sub CPU 81 is determined. It is determined whether or not the "directing No." is the "directing No." corresponding to the development production 2 (S617).

In S617, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determined "effect No." is not the "effect No." corresponding to the development effect 2 (when the determination in S617 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the effect determination process. At the same time as the end, the process at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 247) also ends.

On the other hand, in S617, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determined "effect No." is the "effect No." corresponding to the development effect 2 (when the determination in S617 is YES), the sub CPU 81 develops. The title lottery process is performed with reference to the title lottery table for effect 2 (see FIG. 191) (S618). By this process, the "title No." for the development effect 2 is determined, and the "title No." is registered in the sub RAM 83.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a map lottery process with reference to the map lottery table for development effect 2 (see FIGS. 192 and 193) (S619). By this process, the "map No." for the development effect 2 is determined, and the "map No." is registered in the sub RAM 83. Then, after the process of S619, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect determination process and also ends the start command reception process (see FIG. 247).

Here, returning to the description of the process of S611 again, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S611 that the continuous effect (continuation game) is in operation (when the determination in S611 is YES), the sub CPU 81 is the continuation game. "1" is added to the number counter (S610). The value of the continuous game number counter is set to "0" when the "scenario No." or "map No." is cleared. As a result, the value of the continuous game number counter becomes "1" by adding "1" when the game is started.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the "scenario No." is "0" (S621).

In S621, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the "scenario No." is not "0" (when the determination in S621 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the scenario rewriting lottery process (S622). In the scenario rewriting lottery process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the scenario rewriting lottery table (see FIGS. 175 to 190), and whether or not to rewrite the "scenario No." based on the currently registered "scenario No." Is decided by lottery. Then, when it is decided to rewrite the "scenario No.", the sub CPU 81 changes the "scenario No." to the value of the rewriting destination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the effect determination process during the scenario (S623). In the effect determination process during the scenario, the sub CPU 81 refers to the effect number determination table for development effect 1 (see FIGS. 172 and 173), and develops based on the current "scenario No." and the value of the continuous game number counter. Determine the production number for production 1. Then, the sub CPU 81 registers the determined effect number for the development effect 1 in the sub RAM 83. Further, in the effect determination process during the scenario, when the effect number for the development effect 1 corresponding to the final game of the continuous effect (continuous game) is determined, the sub CPU 81 clears the "scenario No." and the continuous game number counter.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the effect rewriting process (S624). The details of the effect rewriting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 254 described later. Then, after the process of S624, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect determination process and also ends the start command reception process (see FIG. 247).

Here, returning to the description of the process of S621 again, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S621 that the "scenario No." is "0" (when the determination in S621 is YES), the sub CPU 81 is "mapped". It is determined whether or not "No." is "0" (S625). In S625, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the "map No." is "0" (when the determination in S625 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the effect determination process and processes when the start command is received (FIG. FIG. 247) also ends.

On the other hand, in S625, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the "map No." is not "0" (when the determination in S625 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the map rewriting lottery process (S626). In the map rewriting lottery process, the sub CPU 81 refers to the map rewriting lottery table (see FIGS. 201 to 216), and whether or not to rewrite the "map No." based on the currently registered "map No.". Is decided by lottery. Then, when it is decided to rewrite the "map No.", the sub CPU 81 changes the "map No." to the value of the rewriting destination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the effect determination process during the map (S627). In the effect determination process during the map, the sub CPU 81 first refers to the effect lottery table number determination table (see FIG. 194), and based on the current "map No." and the value of the continuous game number counter, the effect lottery table number. To determine. Next, the sub CPU 81 determines the effect number for the development effect 2 based on the sub-game state with reference to the effect lottery table (see FIGS. 195 to 200) corresponding to the determined effect lottery table number. Then, the sub CPU 81 registers the determined effect number for the development effect 2 in the sub RAM 83. Further, in the effect determination process during the map, when the effect number for the development effect 2 corresponding to the final game of the continuous effect (continuous game) is determined, the sub CPU 81 clears the "map No." and the continuous game number counter.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the effect rewriting process (S628). The details of the effect rewriting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 254 described later. Then, after the process of S628, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect determination process and also ends the start command reception process (see FIG. 247).

[Direction rewriting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 254, the effect rewriting process performed in S624 or S628 in the flowchart of the effect determination process (see FIG. 253) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 refers to the effect rewriting condition table (see FIG. 217) and performs the effect rewrite determination process (S631). In this effect rewriting determination process, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not to rewrite the effect based on the lottery flag K and the currently registered effect number for the development effect 1 or the effect number for the development effect 2.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the effect rewriting condition is satisfied in the effect rewrite determination process of S631 (S632). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S632 that the effect rewriting condition is not satisfied (NO in S632), the sub CPU 81 ends the effect rewriting process and also ends the effect determination process (see FIG. 253).

On the other hand, in S632, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the effect rewriting condition is satisfied (when the determination in S632 is YES), the sub CPU 81 clears the determined effect number for the development effect 1 or the effect number for the development effect 2. (S633).

In the present embodiment, the continuous production (continuation game) is forcibly ended when the game progresses without a sense of discomfort by ending the continuous production (continuation game) in the middle. In the process of S633, the "scenario No.", the "map No.", the continuous game number counter, and the like are also cleared.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the effect lottery process (S634). In this effect lottery process, the sub CPU 81 performs the same process as the effect lottery process performed in S612 in the flowchart of the effect determination process (see FIG. 253). That is, in the process of S634, the sub CPU 81 redetermines the "effect No.". Then, after the processing of S634, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect rewriting process and also ends the effect determination process (see FIG. 253).

[Processing when receiving display command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the display command reception processing performed in S537 in the flowchart (see FIG. 246) of the effect content determination processing will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 performs a counting process (S641). The details of the counting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 256 described later. Next, the sub CPU 81 performs VR-related display processing (S642). The details of this VR-related display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 258 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the bonus processing (S643). The details of the bonus processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 260 described later. Then, after the processing of S643, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the display command, and shifts the processing to S538 of the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 246).

[Count processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 256, the counting process performed in S641 in the flowchart of the display command reception processing (see FIG. 255) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not "VR (Viking Rush)" or "R_ART" is in operation (S651). In S651, when the sub CPU 81 determines that "VR" or "R_ART" is in operation (when the determination in S651 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S669 described later.

On the other hand, in S651, when the sub CPU 81 determines that "VR" or "R_ART" is not operating (when the determination in S651 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not "G_ART" is operating. (S652). In S652, when the sub CPU 81 determines that "G_ART" is in operation (when the determination in S652 is YES), the sub CPU 81 subtracts "1" from the value of the combined game number counter (S653).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the combined game number counter has become “0” (S654). In S654, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the combined game number counter is not "0" (when the determination in S654 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S669 described later.

On the other hand, in S654, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the combined game number counter has become "0" (when the determination in S654 is YES), the sub CPU 81 clears the corresponding sub storage area (S655). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 stores "0" in the coalescence mode storage area and the coalescence identification data.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not data (winning information) is stored in the G_ART stock area (S656). In S656, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the data (winning information) is not stored in the G_ART stock area (when the determination in S656 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S669 described later.

On the other hand, in S656, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the data (winning information) is stored in the G_ART stock area (when the determination in S656 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the G_ART start processing (S657). Then, after the processing of S657, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S669 described later.

In the G_ART start processing of S657, the sub CPU 81 refers to the combined game number lottery table (not shown) and determines the number of combined games based on the table number. Then, the sub CPU 81 sets the determined number of combined games in the combined game number counter. Further, the sub CPU 81 refers to a combination mode lottery table (not shown), determines a combination mode based on the table number, and stores the determined combination mode in the sub RAM 83. Further, the sub CPU 81 sets "1" to the value of the combined identification data storage area. Then, the sub CPU 81 clears the reference destination (winning information corresponding to the start address) of the G_ART stock area, and advances the remaining winning information to the next higher address.

In the present embodiment, the number of coalescing precursor games is not determined in the G_ART start processing of S657. That is, after the end of "G_ART", the "G_ART" corresponding to the winning information of "G_ART" stored in the G_ART stock area is started without going through the precursor game. However, in the present embodiment, the precursor game may be played after "G_ART" is completed, and then "G_ART" corresponding to the winning information of "G_ART" stored in the G_ART stock area may be started. .. In this case, in the G_ART start processing of S657, the sub CPU 81 determines the number of coalescing precursor games.

Here, returning to the description of the process of S652 again, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S652 that "G_ART" is not operating (when the determination in S652 is NO), the sub CPU 81 is set to "D_ART" or "B_ART". Is in operation (S658). In S658, when the sub CPU 81 determines that "D_ART" or "B_ART" is in operation (when the determination in S658 is YES), the sub CPU 81 subtracts "1" from the value of the ART game number counter (S659). ).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number counter has become "0" (S660). In S660, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is not "0" (when the determination in S660 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S669 described later.

On the other hand, in S660, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the ART game number counter has reached "0" (when the determination in S660 is YES), the sub CPU 81 continues "D_ART" while it is operating. It is determined whether or not the value of the stock counter is "1" or more (S661).

In S661, when the sub CPU 81 determines that "D_ART" is operating and the value of the continuation stock counter is "1" or more (when the determination in S661 is YES), the sub CPU 81 is in the case of continuing D_ART. Process (S662). Then, after the processing of S662, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S669 described later.

In the D_ART continuation processing of S662, the sub CPU 81 subtracts the value of the continuation stock counter by "1". Further, the sub CPU 81 determines the number of ART games by referring to the continuous ART game number lottery table (not shown). Then, the sub CPU 81 sets the determined number of ART games in the ART game number counter. The number of ART games at the time of continuation may be the same as the number of ART games determined at the first hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the D_ART continuation processing of S662, the sub CPU 81 does not change the loop mode and the ART mode at the time of continuation. However, in the present embodiment, in the D_ART continuation processing of S662, the loop mode and the ART mode at the time of continuation may be changed by lottery.

On the other hand, in S661, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the condition that "D_ART" is operating and the value of the continuous stock counter is "1" or more is not satisfied (when the determination in S661 is NO). The sub CPU 81 clears the corresponding sub storage area (S663). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 stores "0" in the ART mode storage area, the loop mode storage area, and the ART identification data storage area.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not data (winning information) is stored in the ART stock area A (S664). In S664, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the data is stored in the ART stock area A (when the determination in S664 is YES), the sub CPU 81 starts ART based on the winning information stocked in the ART stock area A. Time processing is performed (S665). Then, after the processing of S665, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S669 described later.

In the ART start processing of S665, the sub CPU 81 refers to the winning information corresponding to the start address of the ART stock area A. Then, the sub CPU 81 refers to the ART game number lottery table (not shown), and determines the number of ART games based on the table number. Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the determined number of ART games in the ART game number counter. Further, the sub CPU 81 refers to an ART mode lottery table (not shown), determines an ART mode based on the table number, and stores the determined ART mode in the sub RAM 83.

Further, in the ART start processing of S665, the sub CPU 81 stores "1" or "2" in the ART identification data storage area. That is, if the winning information corresponding to the first address of the ART stock area A is the winning information related to "D_ART", the sub CPU 81 stores "1" in the ART identification data storage area and the winning information related to "B_ART". If it is information, the sub CPU 81 stores "2" in the ART identification data storage area.

Further, in the ART start processing of S665, the sub CPU 81 refers to the ART stock non-consumption lottery table (see FIGS. 142 and 143) to determine consumption / non-consumption. At this time, if non-consumption is determined, the sub CPU 81 does not clear the winning information (winning information corresponding to the first address) referred to in the ART stock area A. On the other hand, when the consumption is determined, the sub CPU 81 clears the winning information referred to in the ART stock area A, and advances the remaining winning information to the next higher address.

Further, in the ART start processing of S665, when the winning information corresponding to the start address of the ART stock area A is the winning information related to "D_ART", the sub CPU 81 uses the loop mode lottery table (not shown). The loop mode is determined based on the table number, and the determined loop mode is stored in the sub RAM 83.

On the other hand, in S664, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the data is not stored in the ART stock area A (when the determination in S664 is NO), the sub CPU 81 stores the data (winning information) in the ART stock area B. It is determined whether or not the data is present (S666). In S666, when the sub CPU 81 determines that data is not stored in the ART stock area B (when the determination in S666 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S669 described later.

On the other hand, in S666, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the data is stored in the ART stock area B (when the determination in S666 is YES), the sub CPU 81 is based on the winning information stocked in the ART stock area B. The ART start processing is performed (S667). The ART start processing of S667 is the same as the ART start processing of S665. Then, after the processing of S667, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S669 described later.

Here, returning to the description of the process of S658 again, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S658 that "D_ART" or "B_ART" is not operating (when the determination in S658 is NO), the sub CPU 81 counts the ceiling. Process (S668). In the ceiling counting process, the sub CPU 81 counts the number of games after the end of the bonus, and when the number of games after the end of the bonus reaches a predetermined value (for example, 1400), the special ART lottery table (its). 2) Refer to (see FIG. 140) and perform an ART lottery.

After the processing of S657, S662, S665, S667 or S668, if S654, S656, S660 or S666 is determined to be NO, or if S651 is determined to be YES, the sub CPU 81 performs a precursor check process (S669). The details of the precursor check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 257 described later. Then, after the processing of S669, the sub CPU 81 ends the counting processing and shifts the processing to S642 of the display command reception processing (see FIG. 255).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the data (winning information) is stored in the ART stock area A and the ART stock area B, the data (winning information) is activated from the "ART" related to the winning information stocked in the ART stock area A. .. That is, all the "ARTs" that display (notify) or notify the winning are activated, and then "ART" that does not display (not notify) that the winning is won is activated.

[Omen check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the precursor check process performed in S669 in the flowchart of the count process (see FIG. 256) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the precursor game is in operation (S671). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of precursor games is set in various precursor counters (any of CZ precursor counter, ART precursor counter, coalescence precursor counter, rocket precursor counter, and VR precursor counter). .. When the sub CPU 81 determines in S671 that the precursor is not in progress (when the determination in S671 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the precursor check process and also ends the count process (see FIG. 256).

On the other hand, in S671, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the precursor is in progress (when the determination in S671 is YES), the sub CPU 81 subtracts the value of the precursor counter by "1" (S672). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the precursor counter is “0” (S673). In S673, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the precursor counter is not "0" (when the determination in S673 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the precursor check process and also ends the count process (see FIG. 256). To do.

On the other hand, in S673, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the precursor counter is "0" (when the determination in S673 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is at the start of CZ (chance zone). (S674). That is, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the precursor counter determined to be "0" in S673 is the CZ precursor counter.

In S674, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is the start of CZ (chance zone) (when the determination in S674 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing at the start of CZ (S675). Then, after the process of S675, the sub CPU 81 ends the precursor check process and also ends the count process (see FIG. 256).

In the CZ start processing of S675, the sub CPU 81 determines the number of CZ games with reference to the CZ game number lottery table (not shown), and sets the determined number of CZ games in the CZ game number counter. Further, the sub CPU 81 stores "1" in the CZ identification data storage area.

On the other hand, in S674, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not at the start of CZ (chance zone) (when the determination in S674 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is at the start of ART (S676). That is, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the precursor counter determined to be "0" in S673 is an ART precursor counter.

In S676, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is the start of ART (when the determination in S676 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the ART start processing based on the winning information stocked in the ART stock area A (S677). ). The ART start processing of S677 is the same as the ART start processing of S665 in the flowchart of the count processing (FIG. 256). Then, after the process of S677, the sub CPU 81 ends the precursor check process and also ends the count process (see FIG. 256).

In the present embodiment, the winning information of the "ART" is always stocked in the ART stock area A at the first hit of the "ART" (see FIGS. 89 and 90). Therefore, in the ART start processing of S677, the winning information stocked in the ART stock area A is always referred to.

On the other hand, in S676, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the start of ART (when the determination in S676 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the start of "G_ART" (S678). That is, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the precursor counter determined to be "0" in S673 is a coalesced precursor counter.

In S678, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is the start of "G_ART" (when the determination in S678 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the G_ART start process (S679). The G_ART start processing of S679 is the same as the G_ART start processing of S657 in the flowchart of the counting process (FIG. 256). Then, after the process of S679, the sub CPU 81 ends the precursor check process and also ends the count process (see FIG. 256).

On the other hand, in S678, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the start of "G_ART" (when the determination in S678 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the start of "R_ART" (S680). That is, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the precursor counter determined to be "0" in S673 is a rocket precursor counter.

In S680, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is the start of "R_ART" (when the determination in S680 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the R_ART start process (S681). Then, after the process of S681, the sub CPU 81 ends the precursor check process and also ends the count process (see FIG. 256).

In the R_ART start processing of S681, the sub CPU 81 determines the coalescence mode based on the table number with reference to the coalescing mode lottery table (not shown), and stores the determined coalescing mode in the sub RAM 83. Further, the sub CPU 81 stores "1" in the rocket identification data storage area. Further, the sub CPU 81 stores "0" in the rocket flag storage area.

On the other hand, in S680, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the start of "R_ART" (when the determination in S680 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the start of "VR" (S682). That is, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the precursor counter determined to be "0" in S673 is a VR precursor counter.

In S682, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the start of "VR" (when the determination in S682 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the precursor check process and also ends the count process (see FIG. 256).

On the other hand, in S682, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is the start of "VR" (when the determination in S682 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the VR start processing (S683). Then, after the process of S683, the sub CPU 81 ends the precursor check process and also ends the count process (see FIG. 256).

In the VR start processing of S683, the sub CPU 81 subtracts the value of the VR stock counter by "1". Further, the sub CPU 81 stores "1" in the VR identification data storage area. As a result, the sub-game state is set to "VR", and "VR" is started from the next game (game) in which the VR start processing of S683 is performed.

[Processing when displaying VR]
Next, with reference to FIG. 258, the VR-related display time processing performed in S642 in the flowchart of the display command reception time processing (see FIG. 255) will be described. In the present embodiment, in the VR-related display time processing described below, when the player's touch operation in the alternative effect is "correct answer" (touch success), a predetermined privilege ("VR") Is activated or the number of ART games is added). That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means (privilege granting means) for granting a predetermined privilege when the touch is successful.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the "VR (Viking Rush)" is in operation (S691). In S691, when the sub CPU 81 determines that "VR" is not operating (when the determination in S691 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the type of the game lock is "game lock 9" (when the determination is NO). S692).

In S692, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the game lock is not "game lock 9" (when the determination in S692 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the VR-related display time processing and displays the processing when the display command is received. The process is transferred to S643 (see FIG. 255).

On the other hand, in S692, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the game lock is "game lock 9" (when the determination in S692 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the billy touch correctness determination process (S693). In the billy touch correctness determination process, the sub CPU 81 has two touch responses (correct or incorrect touch operation contents) determined when the start lever 16 is operated, and VR lock stored in the touch operation identification data storage area. The correctness (correct answer (touch success) / incorrect answer (touch failure)) of the touch challenge is determined based on the touch result in the alternative production. The details of the billy touch correctness determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 259 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the result of the billy touch correctness determination process in S693 is a touch success (correct answer) (S694). In S694, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the touch is not successful (when the determination in S694 is NO), the sub CPU 81 stores "0" in the VR identification data storage area, ends the VR-related display time processing, and processes. Is moved to S643 of the display command reception processing (see FIG. 255).

On the other hand, in S694, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the touch is successful (when the determination in S694 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the VR start processing (S695). In the VR start processing, the sub CPU 81 subtracts the value of the VR stock counter by "1". Further, the sub CPU 81 stores "1" in the VR identification data storage area. Then, after the processing of S695, the sub CPU 81 ends the VR-related display processing, and shifts the processing to S643 of the display command reception processing (see FIG. 255).

Here, returning to the description of the process of S691 again, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S691 that "VR" is in operation (when the determination in S691 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the billy touch correctness determination process. (S696). In the billy touch correctness determination process, the sub CPU 81 is in the touch correspondence (correct answer content or incorrect answer content of the touch operation) determined at the time of operating the start lever 16 and in "VR" stored in the touch operation identification data storage area. The correctness (correct answer (touch success) / incorrect answer (touch failure)) of the touch challenge is determined based on the touch result in the alternative production. The details of the billy touch correctness determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 259 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game in "VR" is the 6G (game) or later (S697). That is, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of touch challenges is the sixth or later. In S697, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game in "VR" is not after the 6th G (when the determination in S697 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the update process during VR (S698). In the VR middle update process, the sub CPU 81 stores the result of the billy touch correctness determination process (touch success / touch failure) in the VR middle correctness identification data storage area.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the touch is successful and the VR medium revolution flag is on (the value of the VR medium revolution flag is “1”) (S699). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S699 that this condition is not satisfied (when the determination in S699 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S701 described later.

On the other hand, in S699, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the touch is successful and the VR middle revolution flag is ON (when the determination in S699 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the VR middle rewriting process (S700). .. In the VR middle rewriting process, the sub CPU 81 successfully rewrites all the results of the VR middle touch correctness determination process up to now.

After the processing of S700, or when S699 is NO determination, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game in "VR" is the 5G (game) th (S701). That is, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the data (“0” or “1”) is stored in all of the VR middle / correct / rejection identification data storage areas. In S701, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game in "VR" is not the 5Gth game (when the determination in S701 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the VR-related display time processing and displays the processing at the time of receiving the display command. Move to S643 (see FIG. 255).

On the other hand, in S701, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game in "VR" is the 5th Gth (when the determination in S701 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the addition process in VR (S702). Then, after the processing of S702, the sub CPU 81 ends the VR-related display time processing, and shifts the processing to S643 of the display command reception time processing (see FIG. 255).

In the VR middle addition process of S702, the sub CPU 81 determines the number of additional games based on the value of the VR middle / right / wrong identification data storage area, and adds the determined number of additional games to the ART game number counter. If all the answers are not correct, the sub CPU 81 stores "0" in the VR identification data storage area and clears the value in the VR middle / right / wrong identification data storage area.

Further, when all the values of the VR middle / right / wrong identification data storage area are "0" (when all are touch incorrect answers), the sub CPU 81 adds "1" to the value of the VR stock counter. That is, if all the answers are incorrect in "VR", "VR" is started again.

Here, returning to the description of the processing of S697 again, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S697 that the game in "VR" is the 6th or later game (when the determination in S697 is YES), the sub CPU 81 is VR. Extra processing is performed (S703). Then, after the processing of S703, the sub CPU 81 ends the VR-related display processing, and shifts the processing to S643 of the display command reception processing (see FIG. 255).

In the VR extra processing of S703, when the result of the touch correctness determination processing during VR is the touch correct answer, the sub CPU 81 adds "320" to the value of the ART game number counter. On the other hand, when the result of the touch correctness determination process during VR is an incorrect touch answer, the sub CPU 81 stores "0" in the VR identification data storage area and clears the value of the VR identification data storage area.

[Billy touch correctness judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 259, the billy touch correctness determination process performed in S693 or S696 in the flowchart of the VR-related display time process (see FIG. 258) will be described.

In the present embodiment, in the billy touch correctness determination process described below, the touch correspondence (correct answer content or incorrect answer content of the touch operation) determined by the VR-related process and the result of the player's touch operation are used. Then, the correctness of the touch operation is determined. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means for determining the correctness of the touch operation (correctness / rejection determination means). Further, in the billy touch correctness judgment process described below, the correctness judgment result of the touch operation obtained based on the touch correspondence determined by the VR-related processing and the result of the touch operation of the player is the touch correspondence for the animation task. Performs the determination process of whether or not it matches the correctness determination result of the touch operation obtained based on the result of the touch operation of the player. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means (fraud determination means) for determining a match between these two correctness determination results. Further, in the billy touch correctness judgment process described below, when the result of the match judgment of the two correctness judgment results described above is "mismatch", the touch correspondence determined by the VR related processing and the player's touch operation The process of rewriting the correctness judgment result of the touch operation obtained based on the result of the above to "incorrect answer" is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means for rewriting the correctness determination result (correctness determination rewriting means).

First, the sub CPU 81 is stored in the touch correspondence (correct answer content or incorrect answer content of the touch operation) determined by the VR-related processing (see FIG. 251) of the start command reception processing and the touch operation identification data storage area. Based on the touch result, the correctness of the touch operation is determined (S711). The touch result stored in the touch operation identification data storage area is data indicating the result of the touch operation performed by the player in the billy touch input process (see FIG. 264 described later) during the animation task described later. is there.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is a touch operation on the character decoration unit by the player (S712). In S712, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no touch operation by the player (when the determination in S712 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the billy touch correctness determination process and performs the process during VR-related display (FIG. 258). (See) to S694 or S697.

On the other hand, in S712, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is a player's touch operation (when the determination in S712 is YES), the sub CPU 81 stores the correctness determination result obtained in S711 and the billy touch result storage area. A match determination with the correctness determination result of the alternative effect is performed (S713). The correctness result of the alternative effect stored in the billy touch result storage area is determined by the player in the billy touch input process (see FIG. 264 described later) in the animation task (see FIG. 263 described later) described later. It is a correctness determination result obtained based on the result of the touch operation (touch result) and the touch correspondence for the animation task saved by the illegal processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 252).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the determination result of S713 is "match" (S714).

Normally, when the player is playing the game in a normal operation, the touch correspondence for the animation task saved in the illegal processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 252) is the touch correspondence used in the correctness judgment processing of S711 (touch operation). Since it is the same as the correct answer content or the incorrect answer content), the determination result of S713 is "match". However, after the touch correspondence for the animation task is saved in the illegal processing when the start command is received, some fraudulent act (goto act) is performed at the time of VR lock or during "VR", for example, the touch correspondence for the animation task is forcibly performed. When rewritten, the determination result of S713 is "mismatch".

Therefore, in S714, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination result of S713 is "match" (when the determination in S714 is YES), the sub CPU 81 does not perform any special game restriction processing, and the billy touch is correct or not. The determination process is terminated, and the process is transferred to S694 or S697 of the VR-related display time process (see FIG. 258).

On the other hand, in S714, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determination result of S713 is not "match" ("disagreement") (when S714 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 is in VR lock or "VR". It is determined that some kind of fraudulent act (goto act) has been performed during ", and the correctness determination result obtained in S711 is rewritten as" incorrect answer "(touch failure) (S715). Then, after the processing of S715, the sub CPU 81 ends the billy touch correctness determination processing, and shifts the processing to S694 or S697 of the VR-related display time processing (see FIG. 258).

In the present embodiment, the privilege is given (correct / incorrect answer, incorrect answer if rewritten) based on the final result (correct answer / incorrect answer, incorrect answer if rewritten) of the correct / false judgment result obtained in S711 at the end of the billy touch correctness judgment process. Whether or not "VR" is activated or the number of ART games is added) is determined.

As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when some kind of fraudulent act (goto act) is performed at the time of VR lock or during "VR", the correctness judgment result of the alternative production (touch challenge) is performed. Is rewritten as "incorrect answer" (touch failure), so that the privilege grant (invocation of "VR" or the addition of the number of ART games) by the alternative production is restricted.

[Processing during bonus]
Next, with reference to FIG. 260, the bonus processing performed in S643 in the flowchart of the display command reception processing (see FIG. 255) will be described. In this process, mainly, a condition for obtaining the privilege of activating ART after the end of the bonus, that is, a determination process of whether or not the above-mentioned "at the time of completing the bonus" condition is satisfied is performed. In the present embodiment, in the bonus processing described below, if the condition of "bonus completion" is not satisfied, the bonus completion flag is turned off. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means (second specific game setting means) for clearing the bonus completion flag.

In the present embodiment, as described above, in the game of "BB3" (Billy Bonus), the symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination in which the payout of medals is "1" is stopped 15 times on the valid line. When the game of "BB3" is completed, the condition of "when the bonus is completed" is satisfied. Further, in the present embodiment, in the game of "BB1", the player does not win any of "C_BB medium control combination 1" to "C_BB medium control combination 6" (the number of medals paid out is 11). That is, even if the navigation ("reverse push navigation") for instructing the reverse push ("right middle left" or "right left middle" push order) is not performed and the game of "BB1" is completed, the "bonus is completed". The condition of "is satisfied.

In the bonus processing, first, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the type of the bonus game currently being operated is "BB3" (S721).

In S721, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of bonus game currently in operation is not "BB3" (when the determination in S721 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S724 described later. On the other hand, in S721, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the bonus game currently being operated is "BB3" (when the determination in S721 is YES), the sub CPU 81 has an internal winning combination of "missing". Alternatively, the display combination determines whether or not the condition that the number of medals paid out is one display combination is satisfied (S722).

That is, in the determination process of S722, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the condition for establishing "at the time of completing the bonus" in "BB3" is satisfied. In this embodiment, the internal winning of "loss" is not included in the non-establishment condition of "at the time of completing the bonus".

In S722, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is "missing" or the display combination determines that the number of medals paid out is one display combination (when the determination in S722 is YES), the sub CPU81 Performs the process of S724 described later. On the other hand, in S722, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the internal winning combination is "missing" or the display combination does not satisfy the condition that the number of medals paid out is one display combination (S722 is NO). In the case of determination), that is, when the condition of "when the bonus is completed" in "BB3" is not satisfied, the sub CPU 81 turns off the flag when the bonus is completed (S723). As a result, ART does not operate after the end of "BB3".

After the processing of S723, if S721 is determined to be NO, or if S722 is determined to be YES, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the type of bonus game currently in operation is "BB1" (S724).

In S724, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the bonus game currently being operated is not "BB1" (when the determination in S724 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the bonus processing and processes when the display command is received. (See FIG. 255) also ends. On the other hand, in S724, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the bonus game currently being operated is "BB1" (when the determination in S724 is YES), the sub CPU 81 uses the bonus game number counter (special game number counting means). ) Is added with "1" (S725).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is one of "C_BB medium control combination 1" to "C_BB medium control combination 6" (a combination in which the number of medals paid out is 11) (S726). .. That is, in the determination process of S726, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the non-establishment condition of "at the time of completing the bonus" in "BB1" is satisfied.

In S726, when it is determined that the internal winning combination is not "C_BB medium control combination 1" to "C_BB medium control combination 6" (the number of medals paid out is 11) (when S726 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 , The processing during the bonus is terminated, and the processing at the time of receiving the display command (see FIG. 255) is also terminated.

On the other hand, in S726, when it is determined that the internal winning combination is one of "C_BB medium control combination 1" to "C_BB medium control combination 6" (the number of medals paid out is 11) (S726 is a YES determination). Case), that is, when the condition of "when the bonus is completed" in "BB1" is not satisfied, the sub CPU 81 turns off the flag when the bonus is completed (S727). As a result, ART does not operate after the end of "BB1". Then, after the processing of S727, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during the bonus, and also ends the processing at the time of receiving the display command (see FIG. 255).

In the present embodiment, as described above, an example in which the value of the bonus game number counter is added (updated) during the bonus game of "BB1", that is, the bonus game number counter is only applied to the bonus game of "BB1". Although examples of use have been described, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, when it is necessary to use the information on the number of bonus games as a control parameter in the processing during the bonus game of "BB2" and / or "BB3", the bonus game number counter may be used in common. .. In this case, in the bonus intermediate processing shown in FIG. 260, the addition processing of the bonus game number counter in S725 may be performed before the determination processing in S721.

[Processing when receiving bonus start command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 261, the bonus start command reception processing performed in S542 in the flowchart (see FIG. 246) of the effect content determination processing will be described. In this embodiment, in the process of receiving the bonus start command described below, the process of turning on the bonus finish flag is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means (first specific game setting means) for setting the bonus completion flag to the information corresponding to the activation of ART.

First, the sub CPU 81 clears the value of the bonus game number counter (S731). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the type of bonus game to be started is "BB1" or "BB3" (S732).

In S732, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of bonus game to be started is not "BB1" or "BB3" (when the determination in S732 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S734 described later. On the other hand, in S732, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the bonus game to be started is "BB1" or "BB3" (when the determination in S732 is YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the bonus completion flag (when the bonus is completed). S733).

After the processing of S733, or when the determination in S732 is NO, the sub CPU 81 sets the bonus start effect data corresponding to the bonus type (S734). Then, after the processing of S734, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the bonus start command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 246).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the bonus completion flag is turned on when the operation of "BB1" or "BB3" is started. Then, as described in the bonus processing in FIG. 260, when a state in which the condition of "at the time of bonus completion" is not satisfied occurs during the bonus game, the bonus completion flag is turned off. As long as the condition of "when the bonus is completed" is not satisfied during the bonus game, the on state of the bonus completion flag is maintained and the condition of "when the bonus is completed" is maintained. Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the on state of the bonus completion flag is maintained at the end of the bonus game, the operation of ART is started after the end of the bonus.

In addition, if a fraudulent act such as RAM clearing is performed during the bonus game in which the condition for establishing "at the time of completing the bonus" is maintained, the flag at the time of completing the bonus is cleared (turned off) at that time. .. Therefore, if cheating is performed in the middle of the bonus game, even if the condition of "at the end of the bonus" is satisfied at the end of the bonus, the flag at the end of the bonus is off, so ART after the end of the bonus. Does not work.

[Processing when receiving bonus end command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the process at the time of receiving the bonus end command performed in S544 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 246) will be described. In the present embodiment, in the process at the time of receiving the bonus end command described below, if the number of bonus games (value of the bonus game number counter) at the end of the bonus is an abnormal value, the ART generation suppression process ( Game regulation processing). That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 also serves as a means (game regulation means) for suppressing the occurrence of ART when there is an abnormality in the number of bonus games at the end of the bonus.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the type of bonus game to be ended is "BB1" (S741).

In S741, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of bonus game to be terminated is not "BB1" (when the determination in S741 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S744 described later. On the other hand, in S741, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the bonus game to be terminated is "BB1" (when the determination in S741 is YES), the sub CPU 81 has a value of the bonus game number counter of "21" or less. It is determined whether or not there is (S742).

In S742, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the bonus game number counter is not "21" or less (when the determination in S742 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S744 described later. On the other hand, in S742, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the bonus game number counter is "21" or less (when the determination in S742 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines the winning states of "B_ART" and "D_ART". At the same time as clearing, the value of the ART game number counter is cleared (S743). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 clears the winning information of "B_ART" and "D_ART" stored in the ART stock area of the sub RAM 83 and the value of the ART game number counter.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of bonus games at the end of "BB1" is not less than 22 times. Therefore, when the value of the bonus game number counter at the end of "BB1" is "21" or less (when the determination in S742 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs some fraudulent activity (for example, when "BB1" is operating). It is determined that RAM clearing (such as RAM clearing) has been performed, and the winning information of “B_ART” and “D_ART” and the value of the ART game number counter are cleared to suppress the occurrence of ART.

After the processing of S743, or when S741 or S742 is determined to be NO, the sub CPU 81 sets the effect data for the end of the bonus (S744). Then, after the processing of S744, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of receiving the bonus end command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 246).

[Anime task]
Next, the animation task executed by the sub CPU 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 263. The animation task is a task performed when executing a video effect based on the registered animation data.

First, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of extracting the registered animation data (S751).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the animation data is registered (S752). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S752 that the animation data is not registered (when the determination in S752 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S754 described later.

On the other hand, in S752, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the animation data is registered (when the determination in S752 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs 2D / 3D animation processing (S753). In this process, for example, when the registered animation data includes the effect video data for 2D display and the effect video data for 3D display, the sub CPU 81 refers to the effect video data for 2D display. Performs a predetermined 2D display process, and performs a predetermined 3D display process on the effect video data for 3D display.

After the processing of S753, or when the determination in S752 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs the billy touch input processing (S754). In this process, the correctness of the touch operation is determined based on the result of the touch operation (touch challenge) by the player and the touch correspondence for the animation task (correct answer content or incorrect answer content of the touch operation), and the determination result (the determination result ( Display (notify) the information of the correct answer (touch success) / incorrect answer (touch failure)). The details of the billy touch input process will be described later with reference to FIG. 264 described later.

Then, after the processing of S754, the sub CPU 81 returns the processing to S751 and repeats the processing after S751. Since the animation task described above is looped at a cycle of about 4 msec, the billy touch input process (billy touch input detection process) is also executed at a cycle of about 4 msec.

[Billy touch input processing]
Next, the billy touch input process performed in S754 in the flowchart of the animation task (see FIG. 263) will be described with reference to FIG. 264. In the present embodiment, in the billy touch input process described below, the touch operation is performed based on the touch support for the animation task (correct answer content or incorrect answer content of the touch operation) and the result of the touch operation of the player. Performs a correctness judgment and performs a process of notifying the judgment result. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 42 determines whether the touch operation is correct or not based on the touch correspondence for the animation task, and also serves as a means for notifying the determination result (correctness result notification means).

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is touch support (correct answer content or incorrect answer content of the touch operation) for the animation task of the alternative effect (S761).

In S761, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no touch support for the animation task (when the determination in S761 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the billy touch input process and performs the process in S751 of the animation task (see FIG. 263). Move to. On the other hand, in S761, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is touch support for the animation task (when the determination in S761 is YES), the sub CPU 81 inputs to the touch sensor (touch operation to the character decoration part of the player). It is determined whether or not there is (S762).

In S762, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no input to the touch sensor (when the determination in S762 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the billy touch input process and performs the process in S751 of the animation task (see FIG. 263). Move to. On the other hand, in S762, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is an input to the touch sensor (when the determination in S762 is YES), the sub CPU 81 saves the touch operation result (touch result) in the touch operation identification data storage area. (S763).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the touch operation is correct or not (touch success / touch failure) based on the touch result and the touch correspondence for the animation task (correct answer content or incorrect answer content of the touch operation), and determines the determination result. , Displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 and stored in the billy touch result storage area (S764). Then, after the processing of S764, the sub CPU 81 ends the billy touch input processing, and shifts the processing to S751 of the animation task (see FIG. 263).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the correctness determination of the touch result of the alternative effect (touch challenge) is performed in the animation task, the result is immediately displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. In the present embodiment, when the touch operation is not performed in the alternative effect (touch challenge), the correctness judgment of the touch operation described above is not performed, and the lottery result (touch correspondence) information is displayed as it is. To.

When the correctness determination result obtained in S764 during the billy touch input process of FIG. 264 does not match the correctness determination result obtained in S711 during the billy touch correctness determination process of FIG. 259 due to some fraudulent act (goto act). In the internal processing, the correct / reject judgment result is rewritten as "incorrect answer (touch failure)" (see S715 in FIG. 259), but the content displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 by the animation task is S764. The content of the judged correctness judgment result is displayed as it is.

For example, in a state where the correct / reject judgment result should be "incorrect answer (touch failure)", for example, the touch correspondence for animation task is forcibly rewritten by some illegal act (goto act), and the billy touch input process (S764). When the correct / reject judgment result in is "correct answer (touch success)", the correctness judgment result is rewritten to "incorrect answer (touch failure)" in the internal processing, but the content displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Is the "correct answer (successful touch)". Therefore, in such a case, the information of "correct answer (successful touch)" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, but the privilege (activation of "VR" or addition of the number of ART games) is given. Absent.

[Reception interrupt processing]
Next, the reception interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 265. In the reception interrupt process, the UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) circuit (serial communication circuit) in the sub CPU 81 receives 1 byte of data from the main control circuit 41, thereby generating an interrupt signal to the sub CPU 81. This is the process that is started when you make it. The CPU activates (reads) the interrupt process corresponding to the type of the interrupt signal generated from the various interrupt processes registered in the program.

First, the sub CPU 81 acquires the received data (S771). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the received data has a physical layer error (S772). The "physical layer error" here is a communication error obtained from the UART circuit, and is, for example, a communication error that occurs in a 1-byte reception unit such as a framing error, a parity error, or an overrun error. is there.

In S772, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no physical layer error in the received data (when the determination in S772 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S774 described later. On the other hand, in S772, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the received data has a physical layer error (when the determination in S772 is YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the command error flag (S773).

After the processing of S773 or when the determination in S772 is NO, the sub CPU 81 saves the received data in the received data temporary area (S774). Next, the sub CPU 81 updates the value of the reception counter (S775). Specifically, the sub CPU 81 adds "1" to the value of the reception counter.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the received data is 8-byte data (S776). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S776 that the received data is not 8-byte data (NO in S776), the sub CPU 81 ends the reception interrupt process. On the other hand, in S776, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the received data is 8-byte data (YES in S776), the sub CPU 81 registers the received data stored in the received data temporary area as a command (when the received data is determined to be YES). S777).

Next, the sub CPU 81 clears the value of the reception counter (S778). Then, after the processing of S778, the sub CPU 81 ends the reception interrupt processing.

The configuration and operation of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention have been described above, including their effects. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and includes various embodiments and modifications as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the present invention described in the claims.

For example, in the above embodiment, when the winning information of "G_ART" is stored in the sub storage area, "D_ART" or "B_ART" is interrupted and "G_ART" is started. Is not limited to this. For example, when the winning information of "G_ART" is stored in the sub storage area, "G_ART" may be executed at the same time as "D_ART" or "B_ART". In this case, during the operation period of "G_ART", the continuous stock lottery and the number of additional games lottery are performed, and the number of ART games is not subtracted. Further, in this case, both the ART lottery of "G_ART" and the ART lottery of "D_ART" or "B_ART" may be performed during the operation period of "G_ART".
As described above, various methods for detecting and suppressing the goto action on the game machine have been conventionally proposed. However, as proposed in Patent Document 1, in the method of notifying an abnormality when a fraud occurs, if the hall clerk of the amusement store does not notice the abnormality notification (error sound or error screen), the fraud is performed. I can't confirm the facts.
Further, in the method of suppressing the goto action as proposed in Patent Document 1, it is possible to cancel the abnormality notification generated by the goto action by an action such as a forced power failure operation and continue the game. Is. In this case, at the time of cancellation of the fraudulent act, the game will be restarted with the factors for establishing the privilege generated by the goto act and the granted privilege remaining, which will give a great profit and loss to the game store. .. On the other hand, if the fraudulent regulation process is uniformly performed (excessive measures are taken) when an abnormality occurs without determining the presence or absence and type of the above-mentioned goto act, the abnormality occurs due to a cause other than the fraudulent act (for example, natural noise). In some cases, the granting of benefits is regulated, which may significantly impair the interests of the player.
Therefore, the present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to detect and suppress fraudulent acts without taking excessive measures against the above-mentioned fraudulent acts. The loss of both the game store and the player is to be suppressed as much as possible.
Further, according to the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to detect and suppress fraudulent activity without taking excessive measures against fraudulent activity, and loss of both the game store and the player can be achieved. It can be suppressed as much as possible.
By the way, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, there is a demand for a technique capable of improving the interest of the game in a special gaming state which is advantageous for the player.
The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game in a special gaming state which is advantageous for a player.
Then, according to the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special gaming state which is advantageous for the player.

1 ... Pachislot (game machine), 2 ... Exterior body, 2a ... Cabinet, 2b ... Front door, 3L ... Left reel, 3C ... Middle reel, 3R ... Right reel, 4 ... Display window, 11 ... Liquid crystal display device, 16 ... Start lever, 17L ... Left stop button, 17C ... Middle stop button, 17R ... Right stop button, 21L, 21R ... Character decoration, 23L, 23R ... Touch sensor, 41 ... Main control circuit, 42 ... Sub control circuit, 51 ... Main CPU, 81 ... Sub CPU

Claims (2)

An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability, and
A variable display means that is composed of a plurality of display columns and displays a symbol required for a game in a variable manner.
A notification means capable of notifying display auxiliary information for displaying a combination of symbols giving an advantageous state to the player on a determination line straddling the plurality of display columns.
Assist time determining means for determining whether or not at least one of the assist times during which the display assisting information can be notified by the notification means is won based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. And with
When the winning of the assist time is determined by the assist time determining means, it is determined whether or not the winning of the assist time can be notified in a specific number of games after the determination .
A game characterized in that the execution of the assist time determined to enable notification of the winning of the assist time is prioritized over the execution of the assist time not determined to enable notification of the winning of the assist time. Machine. An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability, and
A variable display means that is composed of a plurality of display columns and displays a symbol required for a game in a variable manner.
A notification means capable of notifying display auxiliary information for displaying a combination of symbols giving an advantageous state to the player on a determination line straddling the plurality of display columns.
Assist time determining means for determining whether or not at least one of the assist times during which the display assisting information can be notified by the notification means is won based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. And with
When the winning of the assist time is determined by the assist time determining means, it is determined whether or not the winning of the assist time can be notified in a specific number of games after the determination.
The assist time includes a first state and a second state in which it is more difficult to win the assist time than in the first state.
When the assist time is won during the operation of the assist time, the ratio of determining that the win of the assist time can be notified in the first state is the ratio of the assist time in the second state. Yu TECHNICAL machine it is higher than the ratio to determine and to allow notification of winning.

Images